®
ViewSonic
- User Guide
Pro9500
- Guide de l’utilisateur
- Bedienungsanleitung
- Guía del usuario
- Guida dell’utente
- Guia do usuário
LCD Projector
- Användarhandbok
- Käyttöopas
- Podręcznik użytkownika
- Руководство пользователя
- 使用手册 (简体)
- 사용자 안내서
IMPORTANT: Please read this User Guide to obtain important
information on installing and using your product in a safe
manner, as well as registering your product for future service.
Warranty information contained in this User Guide will describe
your limited coverage from ViewSonic Corporation, which is
also found on our web site at http://www.viewsonic.com in
English, or in specific languages using the Regional selection
box in the upper right corner of our website.
“Antes de operar su equipo lea cuidadosamente las
instrucciones en este manual”
Model No. : VS13835
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this unit near water.
Clean with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install the unit in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
8.
9.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
devices (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized
plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade and the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs.
Convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the unit. Be sure that the
power outlet is located near the unit so that it is easily accessible.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the unit. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/unit combination to avoid injury from tipping over.
13. Unplug this unit when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the unit
has been damaged in any way, such as: if the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
if liquid is spilled onto or objects fall into the unit, if the unit is exposed to rain or
moisture, or if the unit does not operate normally or has been dropped.
ViewSonic
ii
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Declaration of RoHS Compliance
This product has been designed and manufactured in compliance with Directive 2002/95/EC of the
European Parliament and the Council on restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive) and is deemed to comply with the maximum
concentration values issued by the European Technical Adaptation Committee (TAC) as shown below:
Proposed Maximum
Substance
Actual Concentration
Concentration
Lead (Pb)
0.1%
0.1%
0.01%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
< 0.1%
< 0.1%
< 0.01%
< 0.1%
< 0.1%
< 0.1%
Mercury (Hg)
Cadmium (Cd)
6+
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr
)
Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB)
Polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)
Certain components of products as stated above are exempted under the Annex of the RoHS
Directives as noted below:
Examples of exempted components are:
1. Mercury in compact fluorescent lamps not exceeding 5 mg per lamp and in other lamps not
specifically mentioned in the Annex of RoHS Directive.
2. Lead in glass of cathode ray tubes, electronic components, fluorescent tubes, and electronic
ceramic parts (e.g. piezoelectronic devices).
3. Lead in high temperature type solders (i.e. lead-based alloys containing 85% by weight or more
lead).
4. Lead as an allotting element in steel containing up to 0.35% lead by weight, aluminium containing
up to 0.4% lead by weight and as a cooper alloy containing up to 4% lead by weight.
ViewSonic
iii
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copyright Information
Copyright © ViewSonic® Corporation, 2010. All rights reserved.
Macintosh and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
ViewSonic, the three birds logo, OnView, ViewMatch, and ViewMeter are registered trademarks of
ViewSonic Corporation.
VESA is a registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standards Association. DPMS and DDC are
trademarks of VESA.
PS/2, VGA and XGA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Disclaimer: ViewSonic Corporation shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material,
or the performance or use of this product.
In the interest of continuing product improvement, ViewSonic Corporation reserves the right to change
product specifications without notice. Information in this document may change without notice.
No part of this document may be copied, reproduced, or transmitted by any means, for any purpose
without prior written permission from ViewSonic Corporation.
Product Registration
To meet your future needs, and to receive any additional product information as it becomes available,
please register your product on the Internet at: www.viewsonic.com. The ViewSonic® Wizard CD-ROM
also provides an opportunity for you to print the registration form, which you may mail or fax to ViewSonic.
For Your Records
Product Name:
Pro9500
ViewSonic LCD Projector
VS13835
Model Number:
Document Number:
Serial Number:
Purchase Date:
Pro9500_UG_ENG Rev. 1A 11-02-10
_______________________________
_______________________________
Personal Identification Number (PIN):
Product disposal at end of product life
The lamp in this product contains mercury which can be dangerous to you and the environment. Please
use care and dispose of in accordance with local, state or federal laws.
ViewSonic respects the environment and is committed to working and living green. Thank you for being
part of Smarter, Greener Computing. Please visit ViewSonic website to learn more.
USA & Canada: http://www.viewsonic.com/company/green/recycle-program/
Europe: http://www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/support/recycling-information/
Taiwan: http://recycle.epa.gov.tw/recycle/index2.aspx
ViewSonic
iv
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PProrjoec9to5r00
User's Manual (detailed)
Operating Guide
About this manual
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect
handling.
NOTICE
This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
• Mac® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
• Windows®, DirectDraw® and Direct3D® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.
•
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights
in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and
areas.
• Blu-ray Disc is a trademark.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
ViewSonic
1
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Introduction .....................................................................................6
Features.............................................................................................................. 6
Checking the contents of package....................................................................... 6
Part names.......................................................................................................... 7
Setting up.........................................................................................8
Arrangement ....................................................................................................... 8
............................................................................. 9
........................................................................... 18
Connecting with your devices
Connecting to a power supply
Using the security bar and slot.......................................................................... 18
Remote control ..............................................................................19
Installing the batteries....................................................................................... 19
About the remote control signal ........................................................................ 19
Changing the frequency of remote control signal ..................................................................... 20
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard...................................................................... 20
Power on/off...................................................................................21
Turning on the power........................................................................................ 21
Turning off the power ........................................................................................ 21
Operating .......................................................................................22
Adjusting the volume......................................................................................... 22
Temporarily muting the sound........................................................................... 22
Selecting an input signal................................................................................... 22
Searching an input signal.................................................................................. 24
Selecting an aspect ratio................................................................................... 24
Adjusting the projector's elevator...................................................................... 25
Adjusting the lens.............................................................................................. 26
Using the automatic adjustment feature....................................................................... 27
Adjusting the position........................................................................................ 27
Correcting the distortion ..................................................................................... 28
Using the magnify feature................................................................................. 29
Temporarily freezing the screen........................................................................ 31
Temporarily blanking the screen ...................................................................... 31
Using the menu function .................................................................................. 32
EASY MENU....................................................................................34
Aspect, Auto keystone,
mirror, reset, filter time, lAnguAge, AdvAnced menu, exit
keystone,
keystone perfect fit, picture mode, eco mode,
,
PICTURE menu...............................................................................36
Brightness, contrAst, gAmmA, color temp, color, tint, shArpness, Active iris, my memory
IMAGE menu...................................................................................39
Aspect, over scAn, v position, h position, h phAse, h size, Auto Adjust execute
INPUT menu...................................................................................42
progressive, video nr, color spAce, component, video formAt, hdmi formAt, hdmi rAnge,
computer in, frAme lock, resolution
SETUP menu ..................................................................................46
Auto keystone,
stAndBy mode, monitor out
keystone,
keystone perfect fit, Auto eco mode, eco mode, mirror,
,
ViewSonic
2
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
AUDIO menu...................................................................................49
volume, speAker, Audio source, hdmi Audio, mic level, mic volume
SCREEN menu................................................................................51
lAnguAge, menu position, BlAnk, stArt up,
source nAme, templAte, c.c.
, messAge,
M
, M
yScreen Lock
yScreen
OPTION menu.................................................................................57
Auto seArch, Auto keystone, direct power on, Auto power off, usB type B, lAmp time,
filter time, my Button, my source, service
NETWORK menu ............................................................................67
setup, projector nAme, my imAge, Amx d.d., presentAtion, informAtion, service
SECURITY menu ............................................................................74
security pAssword chAnge,
yscreen pAssword, pin lock, trAnsition detector,
M
my text pAssword, my text displAy, my text writing, security indicAtor, stAck lock
Presentation tools .........................................................................80
................................................................................... 80
PC-LESS Presentation
Thumbnail Mode, Full Screen Mode, Slideshow mode, Playlist
........................................................................................................
USB Display
89
Right-Click menu, Floating menu, Options window
Maintenance ..................................................................................92
Replacing the lamp ........................................................................................... 92
Cleaning and replacing the air filter ......................................................................... 94
......................................................................... 96
Replacing the internal clock battery
Other care......................................................................................................... 97
Troubleshooting.............................................................................98
Related messages ............................................................................................ 98
Regarding the indicator lamps .......................................................................... 99
Shutting the projector down ............................................................................ 101
Resetting all settings....................................................................................... 101
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects.......................... 102
Specifications ..............................................................................106
ViewSonic
3
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Network Guide
1. Connection to the Network .................................................. 108
1.1 System requirements ............................................................................. 108
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation ..................................................................................108
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer ...................................................... 108
1.2 Installing the “LiveViewer” ...................................................................... 110
1.2.1 Installing the “LiveViewer” .............................................................................................110
1.3 Process to connect the network ............................................................. 112
1.3.1 Process overview ......................................................................................................... 112
1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer” ...............................................................................................113
1.4 Selecting the network connection mode ................................................. 114
1.4.1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN .......................................................... 114
1.4.2 Selecting My Connection ............................................................................................. 116
1.5 Selecting the network connection method .............................................. 116
1.5.1 Passcode connection ................................................................................................... 117
1.6 Manual Configuration ............................................................................. 127
1.6.1 Profile connection ........................................................................................................ 127
1.6.2 History connection ....................................................................................................... 128
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually ............................................. 129
1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination ....................................... 134
1.8.1 Connection and transmission ....................................................................................... 134
1.8.2 Connection error .......................................................................................................... 136
1.9 Profile data ............................................................................................. 137
1.9.1 Outline of Profile data .................................................................................................. 137
1.9.2 Making Profile data ...................................................................................................... 137
1.9.3 Editing Profile data ....................................................................................................... 138
1.9.4 Registering My Connection .......................................................................................... 139
2. Network Presentation ........................................................... 141
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” ........................................................................... 141
2.1.1 Main menu and Operating buttons ............................................................................... 141
2.1.2 Displaying the status .................................................................................................... 143
2.1.3 Switching the display mode ......................................................................................... 144
2.1.4 Option menu ................................................................................................................ 145
2.2 Starting the Network Presentation .......................................................... 147
2.2.1 Display mode ............................................................................................................... 147
2.2.2 Presenter mode ........................................................................................................... 148
2.2.3 Display User Name ...................................................................................................... 148
ViewSonic
4
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3. Web Control .......................................................................... 149
3.1 Logon ..................................................................................................... 150
3.2 Network Information ............................................................................... 152
3.3 Network Settings .................................................................................... 153
3.4 Port Settings ........................................................................................... 154
3.5 Mail Settings ........................................................................................... 156
3.6 Alert Settings .......................................................................................... 157
3.7 Schedule Settings .................................................................................. 158
3.8 Date/Time Settings ................................................................................. 162
3.9 Security Settings .................................................................................... 164
3.10 Projector Control .................................................................................. 165
3.11 Remote Control ..................................................................................... 171
3.12 Projector Status .................................................................................... 172
3.13 Network Restart .................................................................................... 173
4. My Image Function ............................................................... 174
5. Messeger Function ............................................................... 176
6. Network Bridge Function ..................................................... 178
6.1 Connecting devices ................................................................................ 178
6.2 Communication setup ............................................................................. 179
6.3 Communication port ............................................................................... 179
6.4 Transmission method ............................................................................. 180
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX ............................................................................................................ 180
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX ............................................................................................................. 181
7. Other Functions .................................................................... 182
7.1 E-mail Alerts ........................................................................................... 182
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP ...................................................... 184
7.3 Event Scheduling ................................................................................... 184
7.4 Command Control via the Network ........................................................ 188
8. Troubleshooting ................................................................... 193
Appendix ................................................................................... 196
RS232 ............................................................................................................196
PJLink.............................................................................................................219
Instant Stack Guide........................................................................................221
End User License Agreement for the projector software................................ 258
ViewSonic
5
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Introduction
Features
The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features.
ü This projector has a variety of I/O ports that supposedly cover for any
business scene. The HDMI port can support various image equipment which
have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen.
ü This projector has a 1.7 times optical zoom, horizontal and vertical manual
lens shift, allowing flexible installation.
ü If you insert a USB storage device, such as a USB memory, into the USB
TYPE A port and select the port as the input source, you can view images
stored in the device.
ü This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection.
ü The built-in 16W speaker can deliver sufficient sound volume in a large space
like a classroom without external speakers.
Contents of package
Your projector should come with the items shown below. Check that all the items
are included. Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
(1)
(4)
(5)
(1) Remote control with two AA batteries
(2) Power cord
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
MAGNIFY FREEZE
ON
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
㧗
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
POSITION
ENTER
ESC
RESET
(3) Computer cable
(4) Lens cover
(2)
(3)
(5) User’s manuals (Book x1, CD x1)
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special
caution for the lens.
• The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since
a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that
this is not a failure or malfunction.
ViewSonic
6
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Part names
Projector
(1) Lamp cover
The lamp unit is inside.
(2) Speakers (x2)
(3) Filter cover
The air filter and intake vent are inside.
(4) Elevator feet (x2)
(5) Elevator buttons (x2)
(6) Remote sensor
(7) Lens
(8) Lens cover
(9) Pocket caps
(10) Intake vents
(11) Control panel
(12) Lens adjuster door
The adjusters for the lens are behind
the door.
(13) AC IN (AC inlet)
(14) Exhaust vent
(15) Rear panel
(16) Security bar
(17) Battery cover
The internal clock battery is inside.
(18) Heel
WARNING ►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the
manuals direct it.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions.
►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product.
►Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is
on.
►Keep the pocket caps away from children and pets. Make sure they do not
swallow the caps. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency
treatment.
CAUTION ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust
vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this
projector because it could damage the lens, such as melting the lens.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
7
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Part names (continued)
Control panel and Lens adjusters
(1) Lens adjuster door
(2) FOCUS ring
(3) ZOOM ring
(4) HORIZONTAL (horizontal) adjuster
(5) VERTICAL (vertical) adjuster
(6) LOCK (horizontal lens position lock)
(7) STANDBY/ON button
(8) INPUT button
(9) MENU button
(10) SECURITY indicator
(11) LAMP indicator
(12) TEMP indicator
(13) POWER indicator
(14) Cap storage pockets
Rear panel
(1) LAN port
(2) USB TYPE A port
(3) HDMI port
(4) USB TYPE B port
(5) MIC port
(11) COMPUTER IN2 ports
(G/Y, B/Cb/Pb, R/Cr/Pr, H, V)
(12) REMOTE CONTROL port
(13) MONITOR OUT port
(14) CONTROL port
(6) AUDIO IN1 port
(7) AUDIO IN2 port
(8) AUDIO IN3 (R,L) ports
(9) AUDIO OUT (R,L) ports
(10) COMPUTER IN1 port
(15) COMPONENT ports (Y,Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)
(16) VIDEO port
(17) S-VIDEO ports
(18) Shutdown switch
(19) Security slot
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
8
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Part names (continued)
Remote control
(1) VIDEO button
(2) COMPUTER button
(3) SEARCH button
(4) STANDBY/ON button
(5) ASPECT button
(2)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(16)
(8)
(9)
(19)
(17)
(20)
(22)
(10)
(4)
(3)
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
(7)
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
(12)
(14)
(11)
(13)
(15)
(18)
(21)
(23)
(25)
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
(6) AUTO button
(7) BLANK button
POSITION
ENTER
(8) MAGNIFY - ON button
(9) MAGNIFY - OFF button
(10) MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button
(11) VOLUME - button
(12) PAGE UP button
(13) PAGE DOWN button
(14) VOLUME + button
(15) MUTE button
ESC
RESET
(24)
(16) FREEZE button
(17) MY BUTTON - 1 button
(18) MY BUTTON - 2 button
(19) KEYSTONE button
(20) POSITION button
(21) MENU button
(22) ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons
(23) ENTER button
(26)
(24) ESC button
(25) RESET button
(26) Battery cover
Back of
the remote control
ViewSonic
9
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Setting up
Install the projector according to the environment
and manner the projector will be used in.
For the case of installation in a special state
such as ceiling mount, the specified mounting
accessories and service may be required.
Before installing the projector, consult your
dealer about your installation.
Arrangement
Refer to the following tables T-1 to determine the screen size and projection
distance. The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen.
Screen size
Projection distance
(from the projector's end)
Ⓗ × Ⓥ :
ⓐ :
Projector top
: Screen height
ⓑ , ⓒ
Projector bottom
T-1
(1024X768) (±10%)
4:3
16:9
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen
size
Projection
distance
Screen height
Screen height
Ⓗ
Ⓥ
ⓐ min. ⓐ max.
ⓑ
ⓒ
Ⓗ
Ⓥ
ⓐ min. ⓐ max.
ⓑ
ⓒ
(inch) m
m
m inch
m
inch cm inch cminch m
m
m
inch
m
inch cm inch cm inch
30 0.6 0.5 0.9 34 1.5 57 46 18
40 0.8 0.6 1.2 46 2.0 77 61 24
50 1.0 0.8 1.5 58 2.5 97 76 30
60 1.2 0.9 1.8 70 3.0 117 91 36
70 1.4 1.1 2.1 82 3.5 137 107 42
80 1.6 1.2 2.4 94 4.0 157 122 48
90 1.8 1.4 2.7 106 4.5 177 137 54
100 2.0 1.5 3.0 118 5.0 197 152 60
120 2.4 1.8 3.6 142 6.0 237 183 72
150 3.0 2.3 4.5 179 7.5 297 229 90
200 4.1 3.0 6.1 239 10.1 396 305 120
250 5.1 3.8 7.6 300 12.6 496 381 150
300 6.1 4.6 9.1 360 15.1 596 457 180
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0.7 0.4 0.9 37 1.6 63 44 17 -6 -2
0 0.9 0.5 1.3 50 2.1 84 58 23 -8 -3
0 1.1 0.6 1.6 63 2.7 106 73 29 -10 -4
0 1.3 0.7 1.9 76 3.2 128 87 34 -12 -5
0 1.5 0.9 2.3 90 3.8 150 102 40 -15 -6
0 1.8 1.0 2.6 103 4.3 171 116 46 -17 -7
0 2.0 1.1 2.9 116 4.9 193 131 51 -19 -7
0 2.2 1.2 3.3 129 5.5 215 145 57 -21 -8
0 2.7 1.5 3.9 155 6.6 258 174 69 -25 -10
0 3.3 1.9 5.0 195 8.2 323 218 86 -31 -12
0 4.4 2.5 6.6 261 11.0 432 291 114 -42 -16
0 5.5 3.1 8.3 327 13.7 541 363 143 -52 -20
0 6.6 3.7 10.0 393 16.5 650 436 172 -62 -25
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
10
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
WARNING ►Install the projector where you can access the power
outlet easily. If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently.
Otherwise it could cause a fire or electric shock.
►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. If the projector falls
or topples over, it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the
surrounding things. Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an
electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in unstable places, such as an inclined surface,
places subject to vibration, on top of a wobbly table or cart, or a surface that is
smaller than the projector.
• Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in
the manual.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
• For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer
beforehand.
►Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable
things. Such things when heated by the projector could result in a fire and burns.
• Do not place the projector on a metal stand.
►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine
oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from
the mounted position.
►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet. Getting the
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a fire and an
electric shock, and damage the projector.
• Do not place the projector near water, such as in a bathroom, kitchen, or
poolside.
• Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window.
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
11
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Arrangement (continued)
CAUTION
►Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient
ventilation. The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its
internal temperature is too high.
Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock.
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes. Do not place
anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector's
intake vents.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the
projector in such places could cause a fire, an electric shock and malfunction of
the projector.
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers. Especially for an ultrasonic
humidifier, chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could
be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems.
• Do not place the projector in a smoking area, kitchen, passageway or by the
window.
NOTICE • Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the
projector's remote sensor.
• Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
• Check and correct the setting for FAN SPEED of SERVICE in the OPTION
menu according to the usage environment. If the projector is used with a wrong
setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
• Keep heat-sensitive things away from the projector. Otherwise, they may be
damaged by the heat from the projector.
ViewSonic
12
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices
Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to
confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare
the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device.
Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or
the accessory is damaged.
After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform
the connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to the figures in
subsequent pages.
Before connecting the projector to a network system, be sure to read Network
Guide too.
WARNING ►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could
cause a fire or damage the projector and devices.
• Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector’s
manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard.
• Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories.
• Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories.
Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out.
CAUTION ►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end
with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations.
NOTE • Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in
operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. Otherwise it may
cause malfunction in the device or projector.
• The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage
requirements. Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the
following illustration.
• Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction in the device or projector.
- When connecting a connector to a port, make sure that the shape of the
connector fits the port.
- Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port.
- Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of
the projector are recessed.
About Plug-and-Play capability
• Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system
and peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC
2B compatible. Plug-and-Play can be used by connecting this projector to a
computer that is VESA DDC (display data channel) compatible.
- Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the
COMPUTER IN1 port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work
properly if any other type of connection is attempted.
- Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-
and-Play monitor.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
13
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
Computer
NOTE • Before connecting the projector to a computer, consult the computer’s
manual and check the compatibility of the signal level, the synchronization
methods and the display resolution output to the projector.
- Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.
- Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some
signals which are not supported by this projector.
- Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA
(1600X1200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the
resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical.
• If you connect this projector and a notebook computer, you need output the
display to an external monitor, or output simultaneously to the internal display
and an external monitor. Consult the computer's manual for the setting.
• Depending on the input signal, the automatic adjustment function of this
projector may take some time and not function correctly.
- Note that a composite sync signal or sync-on-green signal may confuse the
automatic adjustment function of this projector.
- If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly, you may not see
the dialog to set the display resolution. In such a case, use an external display
device. You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display
resolution.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
14
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
Computer
Access
point
USB
storage
device
CAUTION ► Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure
to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network.
►Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive
voltage.
►Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be
sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your
data.
NOTE • If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB
extension cable to connect the USB storage device.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
15
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
Digital
video
VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc player
device
• The HDMI port of this model is compatible with HDCP (High-band-
width Digital Content Protection) and therefore capable of displaying a video
signal from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like.
NOTE
- The HDMI supports the following video signals:
480i@60,480p@60,576i@50,576p@50,720p@50/60,1080i@50/60,1080p@50/60
- This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMITM
connector, but with some equipment the projector may not work properly,
something like no video.
- Be sure to use an HDMITM cable that has the HDMITM logo.
- When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector, use a
DVI to HDMITM cable to connect with the HDMI input.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
16
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting with your devices (continued)
Monitor
Speakers
(with an amplifier)
Microphone
system
Wired
remote
control
(optional)
NOTE
• If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker, move the
microphone away from the speaker.
Microphone function
•
You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3.5 mm mini-plug.
In that case, the built-in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone, even
while the sound from the projector is output. You can input line level signal to
the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone. Select HIGH in the
MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal
to the MIC port. In the normal mode, the volume of the microphone can be
adjusted separately from the volume of the projector using the menu.
In the standby mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the
VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume
of the projector.
Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE
function, the volume of the microphone is adjustable.
In both modes (standby or normal), the MUTE button on the remote control
works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector.
• This projector doesn't support plug-in power for the microphone.
ViewSonic
17
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting to a power supply
Put the connector of the power cord into the
AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector.
1.
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the
outlet. In a couple of seconds after the
power supply connection, the POWER
2.
AC IN
indicator will light up in steady orange.
Power
cord
Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER
ON function activated, the connection of the power
supply make the projector turn on.
WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult
your dealer to get a new one.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power
cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible.
Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Never modify the power cord.
Anti-theft chain or wire
Using the security bar and slot
A commercially available anti-theft chain or
wire can be attached to the security bar on
the projector. Refer to the figure to choose
an anti-theft chain or wire.
Also this product has the security slot for the
Kensington lock.
security bar
For details, see the manual of the security
tool.
Security slot
WARNING ►Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector
from falling down, since it is not designed for it.
CAUTION ►Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents.
It may become too hot.
NOTE • The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention
measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.
ViewSonic
18
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Remote control
Installing the batteries
Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control
starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for
long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.
Holding the hook part of the battery
cover, remove it.
1
2
3
1.
2.
Align and insert the two AA batteries
(HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.LR6 or R6P)
according to their plus and minus terminals
as indicated in the remote control.
3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,
which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
•
•
Do not place a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery.
If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
About the remote control signal
The remote control works with the projector’s remote
sensor. This projector has a remote sensor on the front.
The sensor senses the signal within the following range
when the sensor is active:
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor)
within 3 meters about.
30°
3m
30°
(approx.)
NOTE • The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available.
If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to make the signal reflect.
• The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1
LED), so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that
could block the remote control’s signal to the projector.
•
The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct sun
light) or light from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter fluorescent
lamp) shines on the remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the position of
projector avoiding those lights.
ViewSonic
19
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Changing the frequency of remote control signal
The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal
frequency Mode 1:NORMAL and Mode 2:HIGH. If the remote control
does not function properly, attempt to change the signal frequency.
In order to set the Mode, please keep pressing the combination of
two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
(2)
(1)
(1) Set to Mode 1:NORMAL... VOLUME - and RESET buttons
(2) Set to Mode 2:HIGH... MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons
POSITION
ENTER
Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ. in the SERVICE item of
the OPTION menu of the projector to be controlled should be set to
the same mode as the remote control.
ESC
RESET
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse
and keyboard of the computer, when the projector’s USB
TYPE B port and the computer’s type A USB port are
connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B
item in the OPTION menu.
USB TYPE B
port
(1) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button.
(2) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button.
(3) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button.
(4) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons ▲, ▼, ◄ and ►.
(5) ESC key: Press ESC button.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
(1)
(2)
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
(6) Mouse right button: Press RESET button.
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
►Improper use of the simple mouse & keyboard
NOTICE
POSITION
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
function could damage your equipment. While using this
function, please connect this product only to a computer. Be
sure to check your computer’s manuals before connecting this
product to the computer.
ENTER
ESC
RESET
NOTE
When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work
correctly, please check the following.
• When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built-in pointing
device (e.g. track ball) like a laptop PC, open BIOS setup menu, then select the external
mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing device may
have priority to this function.
•
Windows 95 OSR 2.1 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may not work
depending on the computer’s configurations and mouse drivers. This function can work with the
computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard.
• You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons
at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally).
•
This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This function is not
available in any of the following cases:
- While the lamp is warming up. (The POWER indicator blinks in green.)
- When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected.
- While displaying BLANK, TEMPLATE or MY IMAGE screen.
- When any menu is displayed on the screen.
- While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the
sound volume, correcting the keystone, correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen.
ViewSonic
20
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power on/off
Power on/off
Turning on the power
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and
correctly connected to the projector and the
outlet.
1.
STANDBY/ON button
POWER indicator
Make sure that the POWER indicator is
steady orange. Then remove the lens cover.
2.
Press STANDBY/ON button on the
projector or the remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and POWER
3.
indicator will begin blinking in green. When the
power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady
green.
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section Selecting an
input signal.
Turning off the power
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control.
The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.
Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in
1.
2.
orange. Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange
when the lamp cooling is complete.
3. Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange.
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off.
Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might
cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp.
WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on.
Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through
any of the projector’s openings.
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just
after use, since it is too hot.
NOTE • Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector
prior to the connected devices.
•
This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on/
off. Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF items of the
OPTION menu.
• Use the shutdown switch only when the projector is not turned off by normal
procedure.
ViewSonic
21
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Operating
VOLUME +/- button
Adjusting the volume
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
Use the VOLUME +/VOLUME - buttons to adjust the volume.
1.
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the
㧗
ON
volume. If you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically
disappear after a few seconds.
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
● When is selected for current picture input port, the volume adjustment is
disabled. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu.
● Even if the projector is in the standby mode, the volume is adjustable when
both of the following conditions are true:
- An option other than is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE
item of the AUDIO menu.
-
NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu.
● In the standby mode, the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the
VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control, in synchronization with the volume
of the projector.
MUTE button
Temporarily muting the sound
Press MUTE button on the remote control.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
1. A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
the sound.
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
㧗
ON
To restore the sound, press the MUTE, VOLUME + or
VOLUME - button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog
will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
1
2
● When is selected for current picture input port, the sound is always muted.
Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu.
● C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when sound is muted and an
input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when
the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPONENT,
COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for
DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu.
Selecting an input signal
Press INPUT button on the projector.
INPUT
button
1.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
VIDEO
USB TYPE A
S-VIDEO
USB TYPE B
HDMI
COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)
●
While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector will
keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected.
It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
●
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
22
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Selecting an input signal (continued)
COMPUTER button
Press COMPUTER button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
1.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
USB TYPE B
USB TYPE A
DOWN
OFF
● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION
menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially
till an input signal is detected. If COMPUTER button is
pressed when VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT or HDMI port
is selected, the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first.
● It may take several seconds to project the images from the
USB TYPE B port.
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
POSITION
VIDEO button
Press VIDEO button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port from the current port as below.
1.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
●
While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION
menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially
till an input signal is detected. If VIDEO button is pressed
when COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A
or USB TYPE B port is selected, the projector will check HDMI
port first.
POSITION
Press the MY SOURCE / DOC. CAMERA button on
the remote control. The input signal will be changed
into the signal you set as MY SOURCE.
MY SOURCE /
1.
DOC. CAMERA button
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
● This function also can use for document camera. Select the
input port that connected the document camera.
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
POSITION
ViewSonic
23
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Searching an input signal
SEARCH button
Press SEARCH button on the remote control.
The projector will start to check its input ports as below in
order to find any input signals.
MY SOURCE/
1.
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
㧗
ON
When an input is found, the projector will stop searching
and display the image. If no signal is found, the projector will
return to the state selected before the operation.
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN
POSITION
VIDEO
USB TYPE A
S-VIDEO
USB TYPE B
COMPONENT
HDMI
● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector
will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is
detected.
●
It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port.
Selecting an aspect ratio
ASPECT button
Press ASPECT button on the remote control.
1.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the
mode for aspect ratio in turn.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
For a computer signal
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
NORMAL
4:3
16:9
16:10
16:10
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
MENU
1
2
For an HDMITM signal
NORMAL 4:3 16:9
POSITION
14:9
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
4:3 16:9 14:9
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or
if there is no signal
● ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.
● NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.
ViewSonic
24
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Adjusting the projector’s elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven
to the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the
projector horizontally.
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to
project at a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the
front side of the projector within 12 degrees.
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons.
An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator
button on the same side as it.
To loose an
Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to
loose the elevator feet.
1.
elevator foot, push
the elevator button
on the same side
as it.
Position the front side of the projector to the desired
height.
2.
Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the
elevator feet.
3.
After making sure that the elevator feet are locked,
put the projector down gently.
4.
To finely
adjust, twist
the foot.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually
5.
twisted to make more precise adjustments. Hold the
projector when twisting the feet.
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the
projector, since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 12 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
ViewSonic
25
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Adjusting the lens
Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen
size.
1.
FOCUS ring
ZOOM ring
Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture.
2.
LOCK
(Horizontal
adjuster lock)
HORIZONTAL
adjuster
Turn the VERTICAL adjuster fully counter
clockwise. Then turn it clockwise and adjust
the vertical lens position upward.
3.
VERTICAL
adjuster
Turn the LOCK counter clockwise to loosen
the lock of the HORIZONTAL adjuster.
4.
Turn the HORIZONTAL adjuster clockwise
5.
or counter clockwise to adjust the horizontal
lens position.
Turn the LOCK fully clockwise to tighten it and lock the horizontal lens
position.
6.
7.
Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture.
►Operate the lens adjusters gently as the lens may malfunction
when subjected to shocks. It may need more strength to turn the adjusters near
the adjustment limits. Be careful not to apply too much strength.
CAUTION
NOTE
• Use a hexagon wrench to turn the VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
adjusters and LOCK. If you do not have a hexagon wrench, you can use a
flathead screwdriver with more careful handling.
• Use the LOCK so that the lens does not shift from the adjusted horizontal
lens position. Adjusting the vertical lens position may shift the horizontal lens
position. This projector is not equipped with a lock for vertical lens position.
ViewSonic
26
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the automatic adjustment feature
AUTO button
Press AUTO button on the remote control.
1.
Pressing this button performs the following.
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
For a computer signal
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal
phase will be automatically adjusted.
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
1
2
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected
automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the
VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu. The vertical position and horizontal
position will be automatically set to the default.
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default.
The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted.
● The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please
note that it may not function correctly with some input.
● When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line
may appear outside a picture.
● When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be
displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the PC model.
●
The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected
for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu.
Adjusting the position
KEYSTONE
POSITION
MY BUTTON
1
MUTE
MENU
Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is
2
1.
indicated.
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.
ENTER
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to adjust the picture position.
When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on
the remote control during the operation.
ESC
RESET
2.
To complete this operation, press POSITION button again. Even if
you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear
POSITION button
after a few seconds.
●
When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, some image
such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture.
● When this function is performed on a video signal or s-video signal, the range
of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu setting. It is not
possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
● If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen, the displayed
picture does not move its position but the menu does.
● This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B
or HDMI port.
ViewSonic
27
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Correcting the distortion
To correct the distortion of projected screen, you can select one of three options,
AUTO, MANUAL and PERFECT FIT.
AUTO: performs the automatic vertical keystone
correction.
MANUAL: allows you to adjust the vertical and
horizontal keystone.
PERFECT FIT: allows you to adjust each of the screen
corners and sides to correct the distortion.
First press the KEYSTONE button to display the KEYSTONE menu, and
point at one of items with the ▲/▼ buttons. Then follow the procedure shown
below for the item you selected.
1.
NOTE
• The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds
of inactivity. Pressing the KEYSTONE button again finishes the operation and
closes the menu or dialog.
• When the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT, neither AUTO nor MANUAL is
selectable. If you wish to use these functions, refer to step 3 in the PERFECT
FIT item to initialize the adjustment of PERFECT FIT.
• When TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON, these functions are not available.
AUTO
When AUTO is pointed at, pressing the ► or ENTER button performs
automatic vertical keystone correction. To close the operation, press the
KEYSTONE button, or pointed at the EXIT in the dialog with ▲/▼ buttons
2.
and press the ► or ENTER button.
MANUAL
When MANUAL is pointed at, pressing the ► or
2.
ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE_MANUAL
dialog.
Select the vertical or horizontal keystone (
with the ▲/▼ buttons.
Use the ◄/► buttons to adjust the keystone distortion.
/
)
3.
4.
5.
To close the operation, press the KEYSTONE button, or pointed at the
EXIT in the dialog with ▲/▼ buttons and press the ► or ENTER button.
Alternatively, point at RETURN in the dialog with the ▲/▼ buttons and press
the ◄ or ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1.
ViewSonic
28
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
PERFECT FIT
When PERFECT FIT is pointed at,
2.
3.
4.
5.
pressing the ► or ENTER button
displays the KEYSTONE_PERFECT
FIT dialog.
If it is necessary to initialize the
current adjustment, point at RESET in
the dialog with the RESET button, and
press the ENTER or INPUT button.
Select one of the corners or sides
to be adjusted with the ▲/▼/◄/►
buttons and press the ENTER or
INPUT button.
Adjust the selected part as below.
●
For adjusting a corner, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to adjust the position of the
corner.
●
For adjusting the upper or lower side, use the ◄/► buttons to select any one
point on the side, and use the ▲/▼ buttons to adjust the distortion of the side.
● For adjusting the left or right side, use the ▲/▼ buttons to select any one
point on the side, and use the ◄/► buttons to adjust the distortion of the
side.
● To adjust another corner or side press the ENTER or INPUT button and
follow the procedure from step 4.
NOTE
• Each corner and side can be adjusted individually but in some cases
it may be adjusted in conjunction with another corner or side. This is due to
control restrictions and not a malfunction.
To close the operation, press the KEYSTONE button, or point at EXIT in the
6.
dialog with ▲/▼ buttons and press the ► or ENTER button. Alternatively,
point at RETURN in the dialog with the ▲/▼ buttons and press the ◄ or
ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1.
ViewSonic
29
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the magnify feature
MAGNIFY
Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control.
The picture will be magnified, and the MAGNIFY dialog will
appear on the screen. When the MAGNIFY ON button is
pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on, the
picture will be zoomed by 1.5 times. On the dialog, triangle
marks to show each direction will be displayed.
1.
ON/OFF button
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
1
2
While the triangles are displayed on the dialog, use the
2.
▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area.
A magnifying glass icon will be displayed on the dialog when the MAGNIFY
ON button is pressed while the dialog with the triangles is displayed.
3.
4.
While the magnifying glass icon is displayed on the dialog, use the ▲/▼ cursor
buttons to adjust the magnification ratio. The magnification ratio will be adjusted
with fine steps. And changes in the ratio in single steps are subtle so they may
be hard to recognize.
5. Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification.
● The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no
operation. The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed
when the dialog has automatically disappeared.
● While the MAGNIFY dialog is displayed, press the MAGNIFY ON button to
switch the dialog between magnifying area shifting (with the triangles) and
magnification ratio adjustment (with the magnifying glass icon).
● The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its
display condition is changed.
● While the magnification is active, the keystone distortion condition may vary.
It will be restored when the magnification is disabled.
● Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is
active.
● This function is not available in the following cases:
- The USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source.
- A sync signal in the range not supported is input.
- There is no input signal.
ViewSonic
30
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Temporarily freezing the screen
FREEZE button
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (however,
1.
MY SOURCE/
COMPUTER
VIDEO
DOC.CAMERA
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the
MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu), and the projector will
go into the FREEZE mode, which the picture is frozen.
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal,
press the FREEZE button again.
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
1
2
● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control
buttons are pressed.
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD
panel might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE
mode for too long.
● Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
Temporarily blanking the screen
BLANK button
Press BLANK button on the remote control.
1.
The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of
MY SOURCE/
VIDEO COMPUTER DOC.CAMERA
input signal. Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu.
ASPECT
AUTO SEARCH BLANK
To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal
FREEZE
PAGE
UP
VOLUME
MAGNIFY
㧗
ON
screen, press BLANK button again.
DOWN
OFF
KEYSTONE
MY BUTTON
MUTE
1
2
● The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when
some control buttons are pressed.
CAUTION ►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp
is on, use the BLANK function above.
Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector.
NOTE • The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function. If
necessary, set the volume or mute first. To display the BLANK screen and mute
the sound at one time, use AV MUTE function
.
ViewSonic
31
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the menu function
This projector has the following menus:
PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK,
SECURITY and EASY MENU.
EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classified
into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU.
Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. While the projector
is displaying any menu, the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor
buttons. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.
POSITION button
POSITION
MENU
MENU button
(Cursor buttons)
ENTER button
ENTER
Cursor
buttons
ESC
RESET
ESC button
RESET button
To start the MENU, press the MENU button. The MENU you last used (EASY
or ADVANCED) will appear. EASY MENU has priority to appear just after
powered on.
1.
2. In the EASY MENU
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to
operate. If you want to change it to the ADVANCED
MENU, select the ADVANCED MENU.
(2) Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to operate the item.
In the ADVANCED MENU
(1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu.
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU,
select the EASY MENU.
The items in the menu appear on the right side.
(2) Press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
move the cursor to the right side. Then use the
▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the ► cursor
button or ENTER button to progress. The operation menu or dialog of the
selected item will appear.
(3) Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
32
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the menu function (continued)
To close the MENU, press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press
3.
the ◄ cursor button or ENTER button. Even if you do not do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds.
●
If you want to move the menu position, use the cursor buttons after pressing
the POSITION button.
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected,
or when a certain input signal is displayed.
● When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote
control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE,
VOLUME) cannot be reset.
● In the ADVANCED MENU, when you want to return to the previous display,
press the ◄ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control.
Indication in OSD (On Screen Display)
The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows.
Indication
EXIT
Meaning
Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu. It's the same as
pressing the MENU button.
RETURN
Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu.
Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present
menu and returns to the previous menu.
CANCEL or NO
Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts
the menu to the next menu.
OK or YES
ViewSonic
33
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY MENU
EASY MENU
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then
perform it according to the following table.
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu.
ASPECT
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.
See the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu.
AUTO KEYSTONE
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
See the
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
See the KEYSTONE in SETUP menu.
KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu.
KEYSTONE
Pressing the ► button displays the KEYSTONE_PERFECT FIT
dialog. See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu.
PERFECT FIT
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP
settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source.
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
BOARD(BLACK)
ó
ó
ó
DAYLIGHT
WHITEBOARD
BOARD(GREEN)
ó
ó
GAMMA
COLOR TEMP
2 MID
3 LOW
NORMAL
CINEMA
1 DEFAULT
2 DEFAULT
3 DEFAULT
4 DEFAULT
4 DEFAULT
5 DEFAULT
6 DEFAULT
DYNAMIC
1 HIGH
PICTURE MODE
BOARD(BLACK)
BOARD(GREEN)
WHITEBOARD
Daylight Mode
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
2 MID
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA and
COLOR TEMP items in PICTURE menu.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function
is operated, but it is not a malfunction.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
34
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY MENU
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons turns off/on the Eco mode.
See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu.
ECO MODE
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for mirror status.
See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu.
MIRROR
RESET
Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu.
Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time
of the air filter.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the OK using the ►
button performs resetting.
FILTER TIME
LANGUAGE
See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu.
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.
See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu.
Press the ► or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE,
ADVANCED MENU IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK or
SECURITY.
EXIT
Press the ◄ or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu.
ViewSonic
35
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE menu
PICTURE menu
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press
the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the
item. Then perform it according to the following table.
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the brightness.
BRIGHTNESS
Dark
Light
ó
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the contrast.
Weak Strong
CONTRAST
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.
1 DEFAULT
6 CUSTOM
6 DEFAULT
1 CUSTOM
2 DEFAULT
2 CUSTOM
3 DEFAULT
3 CUSTOM
4 DEFAULT
5 CUSTOM
5 DEFAULT
4 CUSTOM
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then
pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays
a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode.
This function is useful when you want to
change the brightness of particular tones.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons,
and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.
GAMMA
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the
pattern changes as below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test
pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you
want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern, use the
equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end of the
test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar.
• Lines or other noise might appear on the
screen when this function is operated, but it
is not a malfunction.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
36
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE menu
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.
1 HIGH
1 CUSTOM
2 MID
2 CUSTOM
6 CUSTOM
3 LOW
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
5 CUSTOM
3 CUSTOM
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
4 CUSTOM
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button
or the ENTER button displays a dialog
to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and
GAIN of the selected mode.
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones
of the test pattern.
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones
of the test pattern.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps
• Lines or other noise might appear on the screen
when this function is operated, but it is not a
malfunction.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.
Weak
Strong
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
•
COLOR
For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.
Reddish
Greenish
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
•
TINT
For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies.
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
37
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE menu
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.
Weak
Strong
ó
SHARPNESS
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.
PRESENTATION
THEATER
OFF
ó
ó
PRESENTATION : The active iris displays the best presentation
image for both bright and dark scenes.
THEATER : The active iris displays the best theater image for
both bright and dark scenes.
ACTIVE IRIS
OFF : The active iris is always open.
• The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER
modes are selected. If this occurs select OFF.
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items
of the PICTURE menu).
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or
ENTER button performs each function.
SAVE-1
SAVE-2
SAVE-3
SAVE-4
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
LOAD-4 LOAD-3
LOAD-2
LOAD-1
ó
SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be
lost by saving new data into the memory.
MY MEMORY
LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the
picture automatically depending on the data.
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are
skipped.
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please
save it before performing a LOAD function.
• There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.
• You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON. Please
see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu.
ViewSonic
38
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE menu
IMAGE menu
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
For a computer signal
NORMAL 4:3 16:9
16:10
ó
ó
ó
For an HDMITM signal
NORMAL 4:3 16:9
16:10
14:9
ó
ó
ó
ó
ASPECT
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
4:3 16:9 14:9
ó
ó
For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B
port, or if there is no signal
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.
Small (It magnifies picture)
Large (It reduces picture)
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component
video signal.
• For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or
(2) applies.
OVER SCAN
(1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO.
(2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the
projector recognizes that it receives video signals.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
39
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE menu
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the vertical position.
Down
Up
ó
• Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the vertical position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION
is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN
setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
V POSITION
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal position.
Right
Left
ó
•
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on
the screen. If this occurs, please reset the horizontal position to the
default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is
selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.
H POSITION
• When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video
signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN
setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI por
t.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
40
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE menu
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.
Right Left
ó
H PHASE
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a
component video signal. This function is unavailable for a signal
from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal size.
Small
Large
ó
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal. This function
is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE
B or HDMI port.
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this
operation.
H SIZE
• Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but
it is not a malfunction.
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.
For a computer signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal
phase will be automatically adjusted.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For a video signal and s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be
selected automatically. This function is available only when the
AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu.
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically
set to the default.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
For a component video signal
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically
set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically
adjusted.
• The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds.
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
• When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra
such as a line may appear outside a picture.
• When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black
frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on
the PC model.
• The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or
DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE
item in the OPTION menu.
ViewSonic
41
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT menu
INPUT menu
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.
TV FILM OFF
ó
ó
•
This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component
video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMITM
signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
PROGRESSIVE
.
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.
FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select OFF, even
though the screen image may lose sharpness.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.
HIGH
MID
LOW
ó
ó
VIDEO NR
• This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal,
component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60)
and an HDMITM signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.
AUTO
RGB
SMPTE240
REC709
REC601
ó
ó
ó
ó
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal (except for
signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports) or a
component video signal (except SCART RGB).
COLOR SPACE
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT
ports.
COMPONENT
SCART RGB
ó
COMPONENT
When the SCART RGB is selected, the COMPONENT (Y, Cb/
Pb, Cr/Pr) and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port.
A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB
input to the projector. For details, contact your dealer.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
42
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT menu
Item
Description
The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to
select the input port.
(2) Using the ◄/► buttons
switches the mode for video
format.
AUTO
NTSC
PAL
SECAM
ó
ó
ó
VIDEO FORMAT
N-PAL
M-PAL
NTSC4.43
ó
ó
• This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port
or the S-VIDEO port.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),
please select the mode according to the input signal.
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the video format for an
input from the HDMI port.
AUTO
VIDEO
COMPUTER
ó
ó
Feature
HDMI FORMAT
AUTO
VIDEO
COMPUTER
automatically sets the optimum mode.
sets the suitable mode for DVD signals.
sets the suitable mode for computer signals.
• When the COMPUTER is selected, the functions COLOR
(PICTURE menu), TINT (PICTURE menu) and OVER SCAN
(IMAGE menu) are unavailable.
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the digital range for input
from the HDMI port.
AUTO
NORMAL
ENHANCED
ó
ó
Feature
automatically sets the optimum mode.
ets the suitable mode for DVD signals. (16-235)
sets the suitable mode for computer signals. (0-255)
HDMI RANGE
AUTO
NORMAL
ENHANCED
s
• If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try
finding a more suitable mode.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
43
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT menu
Item
Description
The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports
can be set.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select
the computer input signal type.
AUTO
SYNC ON G OFF
ó
COMPUTER IN
• Selecting the AUTO mode allows
you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the
port.
• In the AUTO mode, the picture may be distorted with certain
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that
no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF, and then
reconnect the signal.
Set the frame lock function on/off for each port.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the input ports.
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to turn the
frame lock function on/off .
FRAME LOCK
ON
OFF
ó
• This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical
frequency of 49 to 51Hz, 59 to 61 Hz.
• When ON is selected, moving pictures are displayed more
smoothly.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
44
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT menu
Item
Description
The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input
signals can be set on this projector.
(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼
buttons and press the ► button.
The RESOLUTION menu will be
displayed.
(2) In the RESOLUTION menu select the
resolution you wish to display using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution
appropriate to the input signal.
(3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when
selecting a STANDARD resolution will
automatically adjust the horizontal and
STANDARD
vertical positions, clock phase and
horizontal size.
↓
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be
displayed.
(4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼ buttons to select
the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be
RESOLUTION
displayed.
CUSTOM
Set the horizontal (HORZ) and
↓
vertical (VERT) resolutions using
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
This function may not support all
resolutions.
(5) Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the ► or ENTER
button. The message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO
CHANGE RESOLUTION?" appears. To save the setting, press
the ► button.
The horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal
size will be automatically adjusted.
The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog
will be displayed.
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes,
move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the ◄ or
ENTER button.
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu
displaying the previous resolution.
• For some pictures, this function may not work well.
ViewSonic
45
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP menu
SETUP menu
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item
Description
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function again.
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item
in the SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled
downward, this function may not work correctly.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
AUTO KEYSTONE
• When the projector is placed on the level (about ±4°), this function
may not work.
• When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this
function may not work well.
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is
ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT.
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
Shrink the bottom of the image
Shrink the top of the image
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
KEYSTONE
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is
ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
46
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP menu
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
Shrink the right of the image Shrink the left of the image
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function
may not work well.
KEYSTONE
• This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is
ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT.
Selecting this item displays the KEYSTONE_PERFECT FIT dialog.
For details, see PERFECT FIT in Correcting the distortion.
PERFECT FIT
• This is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ECO MODE.
ON
OFF
ó
• When ON is selected, the projector will always be set to Eco mode
at start-up regardless of the ECO MODE setting. An OSD message
“AUTO ECO MODE” will be displayed for tens of seconds when the
projector starts with this function activated.
AUTO ECO MODE
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns off/on the Eco mode.
NORMAL
ECO
ó
• When the ECO is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness
are reduced.
ECO MODE
• When AUTO ECO MODE is set to ON, the projector will always be
set to Eco mode at start-up regardless this setting.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for mirror status.
MIRROR
NORMAL
H:INVERT
V:INVERT
H&V:INVERT
ó
ó
ó
If the Transition Detector is on and MIRROR status is changed,
TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed when
projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
47
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP menu
Item
Description
Using ▲/▼ buttons switches the standby mode setting between
NORMAL and SAVING.
NORMAL
SAVING
ó
When SAVING is selected, the power consumption in the standby
mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below:
• When SAVING is selected, the RS-232C communication control
except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled
while the projector is in the standby mode. If the COMMUNICATION
TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK
BRIDGE, all of the RS-232C commands are disabled.
• When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE
is invalid, and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the
standby mode.
STANDBY MODE
• When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT
is invalid, and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the
standby mode.
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the image signal from the input port selected in step (2) is
output to MONITOR OUT port.
(1) Choose a picture input port using ▲/▼ buttons.
Choose STANDBY to select the picture
output in the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT
(2) Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports
using ◄/► buttons.
Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT
port for the input port or standby mode
chosen in the step (1).
• You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in step (1) and COMPUTER IN2
in step (2) and vice versa.
ViewSonic
48
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
AUDIO menu
From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor
buttons, and press the ► cursor button or the ENTER
button to execute the item. Then perform it according to
the following table.
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume.
VOLUME
Low
High
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker.
ON OFF
SPEAKER
ó
When OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work.
While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is
projected, the audio signal from the input port selected in step
(2) is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built-in speaker of
this projector. However, the built-in speaker does not work when
SPEAKER is set to OFF.
(1) Choose a picture input port using the
▲/▼ buttons.
Choose STANDBY to select the sound
output in the standby mode.
(2) Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using
◄/► buttons.
Select to mute the sound from the
AUDIO SOURCE
input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step (1).
• In the AUDIO SOURCE window, “H” symbolizes the audio signal
from the HDMI port. It can be selected only for the picture input from
the HDMI port.
• Even if the projector is in the standby mode, cooling fans may
work and make noises when the built-in speaker is in operation.
• C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when is selected
and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is
available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or
480i@60 for COMPONENT, COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2,
and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the
SCREEN menu.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
49
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the HDMITM audio.
Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one
HDMI AUDIO
for your HDMITM audio device.
1
2
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the input level to match that of the
microphone connected to the MIC port.
MIC LEVEL
HIGH ó LOW
HIGH: for a microphone with an amplifier.
LOW: for a microphone without an amplifier.
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone
connected to the MIC port.
MIC VOLUME
Low
High
ó
ViewSonic
50
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
SCREEN menu
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to
execute the item. Then perform it according to the
following table.
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons switches the OSD (On Screen
Display) language.
ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
ó
ó
ó
LANGUAGE
(shown in the LANGUAGE dialog)
Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting.
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position.
MENU POSITION To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control
or keep no operation for about 10 seconds.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen.
The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature. It
is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
ó
ó
ó
ó
BLANK
MyScreen : Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item.
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
BLUE, WHITE, BLACK : Plain screens in each color.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an
unsuitable signal is detected.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
OFF
ó
ó
MyScreen : Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item.
ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen.
OFF : Plain black screen.
START UP
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the BLANK screen after several minutes. If
also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL, the plain
black screen is instead used.
• When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in
the SECURITY menu, the START UP is fixed to MyScreen.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
51
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
Item
Description
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the
following procedure.
1. Selecting this item displays a dialog
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if
you start capturing an image from
the current screen.
Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press the
ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed. The image
will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear.
To stop performing, press the RESET button on the remote
control.
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the
frame position.
Please move the frame to the position
of the image which you want to use. The
frame may not be able to be moved for
some input signals.
MyScreen
To start registration, press the ENTER
or INPUT button on the remote control.
To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the
RESET button on the remote control.
Registration may take several minutes.
When the registration is completed, the registered screen and the
following message is displayed for several seconds:
“MyScreen registration is finished.”
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:
“A capturing error has occurred. Please try again.”
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen Lock item.
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu.
•
This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A,
USB TYPE B or HDMI port.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
52
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.
ON OFF
ó
When the ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use this
function for protecting the current MyScreen.
MyScreen Lock
• This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the
MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.
ON
OFF
ó
When the ON is selected, the following message function works.
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”
“INVALID SCAN FREQ.”
“Searching….” while searching for the input
“Detecting….” while an input signal is detected
“AUTO ECO MODE” while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing
The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing
The indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while freezing the screen by
pressing the FREEZE button.
MESSAGE
The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing.
• When the OFF is selected, please remember if the picture is
frozen. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
53
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
Item
Description
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE
NAME and press the ► or ENTER button.
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE
NAME menu to select the port to be
named and press the ► button. The
SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.
Right side of the menu is blank until a
name is specified.
(3) Select an icon you would like to assign to
the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog.
The name assigned to the port will also be
automatically switched according to your
icon selection. Press the ENTER or INPUT
button to determine your icon selection.
SOURCE NAME
(4) Select a number you would like to assign
to the port along with the icon. You can
select the number either from blank
(no number assigned), 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Then press the ENTER or INPUT button.
(5) If you would like to modify the name assigned
to the port, select CUSTOM NAME and
press the ENTER or INPUT button.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
54
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
Item
Description
(6) The current name will be displayed on
the first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons
and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters. To erase 1
character at one time, press the RESET
button or press the ◄ and INPUT button
at the same time. Also if you move the
cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on
screen and press the ENTER or INPUT
button, 1 character or all characters will
be erased. The name can be a maximum
of 16 characters.
SOURCE NAME
(Continued)
(7) To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲ button to move the cursor to
the first line, and use the ◄/► buttons to
move the cursor on the character to be
changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is
selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the
item (6) above.
(8) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL
on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the mode for the template
screen.
Press the ► cursor (or the ENTER) button to display the selected
template, and press the ◄ cursor button to close the displayed
screen.
The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON
allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed.
TEMPLATE
TEST PATTERN
DOT-LINE1
DOT-LINE2
DOT-LINE3
ó
ó
ó
STACK MAP2 MAP1 CIRCLE2 CIRCLE1 DOT-LINE4
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when
MAP1 or MAP2 is selected. To invert or scroll the map, display
the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three
seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
55
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN menu
Item
Description
The C.C. is the function that displays a
transcript or dialog of the audio portion of
a video, files or other presentation or other
relevant sounds. It is required to have NTSC
format video or 480i@60 format component
video source supporting C.C. feature to
utilize this function.
It may not work properly, depending on equipment or signal source.
In this case, please turn off the Closed Caption.
DISPLAY
Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
AUTO
ON
OFF
ó
ó
AUTO : Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume
is muted.
ON : Closed Caption is on.
OFF : Closed Caption is off.
• The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active.
• The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue,
narration, and / or sound effects of a television program or other
video sources. The Closed Caption availability is depending upon
broadcaster and/or content.
C.C.
(Closed Caption)
MODE
Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using
▲/▼ buttons.
CAPTIONS
TEXT
ó
CAPTIONS : Display Closed Caption.
TEXT : Display Text data, which is for additional information such
as news reports or a TV program guide. The information
covers the entire screen. Not all of the C.C. program has
Text information.
CHANNEL
Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using ▲/▼
buttons.
1
2
3
4
ó
ó
ó
1: Channel 1, primary channel / language
2: Channel 2
3: Channel 3
4: Channel 4
The channel data may vary, depending on the content. Some
channel might be used for secondary language or empty.
ViewSonic
56
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
OPTION menu
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and
press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute
the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER
TIME. Then perform it according to the following table.
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search
function.
ON
OFF
ó
When the ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from
the current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop
searching and display the image.
AUTO SEARCH
COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPE A
ð
ð
ð
VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENT HDMI USB TYPE B
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the
USB TYPE B port.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.
ON
OFF
ó
ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed
whenever changing the slant of the projector.
OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO
KEYSTONE (EXECUTE) in the SETUP menu for automatic
keystone distortion correction.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will
not function properly so select the OFF.
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is
on.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the DIRECT POWER ON
function.
ON
OFF
ó
When set to the ON, the lamp in projector will be automatically turned
on without the usual procedure, only when the projector is supplied with
the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on.
• This function does not work as long as the power has been
supplied to the projector while the lamp is off.
DIRECT POWER
ON
•
After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function,
if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the
projector is turned off, even though the AUTO POWER OFF function
is disabled.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
57
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to
automatically turn the projector off.
Long (max. 99 minutes)
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)
ó
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.
When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with
no-signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the
projector lamp will be turned off.
AUTO POWER
OFF
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is
transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time,
projector will not be turned off.
Please refer to the section Turning off the power.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port.
To use this function, you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of
the projector and the type A USB port of a computer.
MOUSE
USB DISPLAY
ó
MOUSE : The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse
and keyboard of the computer.
USB DISPLAY : The port works as an input port that receives image
signals from the computer.
• It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB
TYPE B port.
• In the following cases, a message to notify you that USB TYPE B
port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB
TYPE B dialog:
USB TYPE B
- This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the
USB TYPE B port is projected.
- The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while
this setting is set to MOUSE. Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to
project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you
cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise
select other port for picture input.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
58
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the lamp time, select the OK using the ► button.
LAMP TIME
CANCEL OK
ð
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
•
For the lamp replacement, see the section Replacing the lamp
The filter time is the usage time of the air filter, counted after the last
resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the filter time, select the OK using the ► button.
FILTER TIME
CANCEL OK
ð
•
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• For the air filter cleaning, see the section Cleaning and replacing
the air filter.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
59
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON
1/2 on the remote control.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY
BUTTON - (1/2) and press the ► or ENTER button to display the
MY BUTTON setup dialog.
(2) Then using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons sets one of the following
functions to the chosen button. Press the ENTER or INPUT
button to save the setting.
• LAN: Selects input from LAN port.
• USB TYPE A: Selects input from USB TYPE A port.
• USB TYPE B: Selects input from USB TYPE B port.
• HDMI: Selects input from HDMI port.
• COMPUTER IN1: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port.
• COMPUTER IN2: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port.
• COMPONENT: Selects the input from COMPONENT ports.
• S-VIDEO: Selects the input from S-VIDEO port.
• VIDEO: Selects the input from VIDEO port.
•
SLIDESHOW: Selects the input from USB TYPE A, and starts a Slideshow.
• MY IMAGE: Displays the MY IMAGE menu.
• MESSENGER: Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on/off
(5. Messenger Function in the Network Guide).
When there is no transferred text data to display, the message ”NO
MESSENGER DATA" appears.
MY BUTTON
• INFORMATION: Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION,
INPUT_INFORMATION, NETWORK_INFORMATION or nothing.
• AUTO KEYSTONE : Performs automatic keystone distortion
correction.
• MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored.
When more than one data are saved, the adjustment
changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed.
When no data is saved in memory, the
dialog "No saved data" appears.
When the current adjustment is not
saved to memory, the dialog as shown in
the right appears.
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press
the ► button to exit. Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the
current adjusted condition.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
60
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
• ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode.
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE.
•
FILTER RESET: Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue.
• TEMPLATE: Makes the template pattern selected to the
TEMPLATE item appear or disappear.
MY BUTTON
(Continued)
• AV MUTE: Turns the picture and audio on/off.
• RESOLUTION: Turns on/off the RESOLUTION dialog.
• MIC VOLUME: Turns on/off the MIC VOLUME dialog.
• ECO MODE: Turns on/off the ECO MODE dialog.
Using ▲/▼ buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with
pressing the MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button on the remote
control.
You can use this function not only for document cameras but also
computers and other equipment.
MY SOURCE
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
LAN
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B
ó
ó
ó
ó
VIDEO S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
HDMI
ó
ó
ó
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
61
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE
menu.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons,
and press the ► button or the ENTER
button on the remote control to execute
the item.
FAN SPEED
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans.
The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc. If the projector is used
at an altitude of about 1200 m or higher, select HIGH. Otherwise, select
NORMAL. Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected.
HIGH
NORMAL
ó
AUTO ADJUST
Using the ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the mode. When the
DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is disabled.
FINE
FAST
DISABLE
ó
ó
FINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment.
FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the
input signal.
•
Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to the
projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic adjustment
may not work correctly. In such a case, please choose DISABLE to
disable the automatic adjustment, and make adjustment manually.
SERVICE
GHOST
1. Select a color element of ghost using
the ◄/► buttons.
2. Adjust the selected element using the
▲/▼ buttons to disappear ghost.
FILTER MESSAGE
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for notifying by the message
when to replace the filter unit
100h
200h
500h
1000h
2000h
5000h
OFF
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
After choosing an item except OFF, the message “REMINDER ***
HRS PASSED ....” will appear after the timer reaches the interval
time set by this feature.
When the OFF is chosen, the message will not appear. Utilize this
feature to keep the air filter clean, setting the suitable time according
to your environment of this projector.
• Please take care of the filter unit periodically, even if there is
no message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or
other matter, the internal temperature will rise, which could cause
malfunction, or reduce the lifetime of the projector.
• Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector
and the condition of the filter unit.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
62
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
KEY LOCK
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to choose the operations control.
CONTROL PANEL REMOTE CONTROL
ó
(2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select ON or OFF.
ON OFF
ó
Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY/ON on
the operations control selected in Step 1. Selecting OFF releases
the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1.
• Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental
operation.
REMOTE FREQ.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to change the projector's remote sensor
frequency setting.
1:NORMAL
2:HIGH
ó
(2) Use the ◄/► button to change the
projector's remote sensor on or off.
ON
OFF
ó
The factory default setting is for both 1:NORMAL and 2:HIGH to be
on. If the remote control does not function correctly, disable either of
them.
SERVICE
(continued)
It's not possible to disable both options at the same time.
Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION
menu.
In this menu, you can configure the serial
communication settings of the projector using the
CONTROL port.
• Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼.
COMMUNICATION
Then pressing the ► button opens the submenu
for the setting item you selected. Or, pressing
the ◄ button instead of the ► button makes the
menu back to the previous one without changing
the setup. Each submenu can be operated as
described above.
• When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF,
the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are
invalid.
• For the function of serial communication, refer to
the Network Guide.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
63
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
COMMUNICATION TYPE
Select the communication type for transmission via
the CONTROL port.
NETWORK BRIDGE OFF
ó
NETWORK BRIDGE: Select this type, if it is required
to control an external device as a network terminal,
via this projector from the computer.
The CONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C
commands (6. Network Bridge Function in the
Network Guide
)
OFF: Select this mode to receive RS-232C
commands using the CONTROL port.
•
OFF is selected as the default setting.
• When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE, check
the item, TRANSMISSTION METHOD.
SERIAL SETTINGS
Select the serial communication condition for the
CONTROL port.
BAUD RATE
4800bps
9600bps
19200bps
38400bps
ó
ó
ó
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
PARITY
NONE
ODD
EVEN
ó
ó
•
The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY
is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE
is set to OFF
.
TRANSMISSION METHOD
Select the transmission method for communication by
the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port.
HALF-DUPLEX
FULL-DUPLEX
ó
HALF-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is
allowed at a time.
FULL-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector
make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time.
• HALF-DUPLEX is selected as the default setting.
• If you select HALF-DUPLEX, check the setting of
the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
64
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
RESPONSE LIMIT TIME
Select the time period to wait for receiving
response data from other device communicating by
the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF-DUPLEX
through the CONTROL port.
OFF
1s
2s
3s
ó
ó
ó
OFF: Select this mode if it is not required to check
the responses from the device that the projector
sends data to. In this mode, the projector can
send out data from the computer continuously.
1s /2s /3s: Select the time period to keep the
projector waiting for response from the device
that the projector sends data to. While waiting the
response, the projector does not send out any
data from the CONTROL port.
SERVICE
(continued)
COMMUNICATION
(continued)
• This menu is available only when the NETWORK
BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION
TYPE and the HALF-DUPLEX is selected for the
TRANSMISSION METHOD.
• OFF is selected as the default setting.
STACK
Selecting this item displays the STACK menu.
For more information, please see Instant Stack
Guide.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
65
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION menu
Item
Description
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT_INFORMATION”.
It shows the information about the current input.
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock
function is working.
• The “SCART RGB” message means the COMPONENT ports
is working as a SCART RGB input port. Please refer to the
COMPONENT item in INPUT menu.
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.
• When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON, the MY TEXT is
displayed together with the input information in the
INPUT_INFORMATION box.
SERVICE
(continued)
FACTORY RESET
Selecting OK using the ► button performs this function. By this
function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the
initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,
LANGUAGE, FILTER MESSAGE, NETWORK and SECURITY
settings are not reset.
CANCEL OK
ð
ViewSonic
66
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
NETWORK menu
Remember that incorrect network settings on this
projector may cause trouble on the network. Be sure
to consult with your network administrator before
connecting to an existing access point on your network.
Select “NETWORK” from the main menu to access the
following functions.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or
remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. Then
perform it according to the following table.
See the Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation.
NOTE • If you are not utilizing SNTP (3.9 Date/Time Settings in the Network
Guide), then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation.
• The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in
standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING.
Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the
STANDBY MODE to NORMAL.
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the SETUP
Menu for the network.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item,
and the ► or ENTER button on the remote
control to perform the item.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
ON
OFF
ó
SETUP
Select OFF when the network does not have
DHCP enabled.
DHCP
(Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
• When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it
takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP
server.
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if
the projector could not obtain an IP address from
server even if DHCP is “ON”.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
67
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
IP ADDRESS
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies
this projector on the network. You cannot have two
devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same
network.
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same
SUBNET MASK used by your computer.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
SUBNET
MASK
• The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT
GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network)
address.
This function can only be used when DHCP is set
to OFF.
DEFAULT
GATEWAY
SETUP
(continued)
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS
server address.
The DNS server is a system to control domain
names and IP addresses on the Network.
DNS SERVER
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME
DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one
set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
TIME
DIFFERENCE
Use the ► button to return to the menu after
setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last
two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute.
DATE AND
TIME
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve
DATE AND TIME information from the Time server
when SNTP is enabled. (3.9 Date/Time Settings
in the Network Guide)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
68
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
NETWORK menu to select the
PROJECTOR NAME and press
the ► button. The PROJECTOR
NAME dialog will be displayed.
(2) The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the first 3
lines. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to
select and enter characters.
To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you
move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and
push the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters
will be erased.The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64
characters.
PROJECTOR
NAME
(3) To change an already inserted
character, press the ▲/▼ button
to move the cursor to one of the
first 3 lines, and use the ◄/►
buttons to move the cursor on the
character to be changed. After
pressing the ENTER or INPUT
button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure
as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and
press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous
PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes, move the cursor
to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT
button.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
69
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the MY
IMAGE menu.
To store images in the projector, the
application software PJImg/Projector
Image Tool that can be downloaded
from our website is required.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which is a still image by the
MY IMAGE (4. My Image Function in the Network Guide) and the ►
or ENTER button to display the image.
• The item without image stored cannot be selected.
• The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less.
MY IMAGE
To switch the image displayed
Use the ▲/▼ buttons.
To return to the menu
Press the ◄ button on the remote control.
To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector.
(1) Press the RESET button on the
remote control while displaying an
image to display the MY IMAGE
DELETE menu.
(2) Press the ► button to perform to erase.
To stop erasing, press the ◄ button.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on/off.
ON
OFF
ó
AMX D.D.
(AMX Device
Discovery)
When ON is selected, the projector can be detected by controllers
of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX
Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com/ (as of Aug. 2010)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
70
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu.
Use ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the following items, then press ►
or ENTER button to use the function.
If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while
its image is projected, the projector is occupied by
the computer and access from any other computer is
blocked.
Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and
allow other computers to access the projector.
QUIT
PRESENTER Select this item to display a dialog.
MODE
Press ► button to choose OK in the dialog.
The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is
displayed indicating the result.
• To make Presenter mode setting, use “LiveViewer”.
For details, see the section 2.2.2 Presenter mode in
the Network Guide.
PRESENTATION
If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC
mode on “LiveViewer” and send their images to the
projector, you can select the display mode on the
projector from two options below.
- Single PC mode: displays the image of the selected
computer on full screen.
- Multi PC mode: displays the images sent from up to
four computers on screen that is divided into quarter
sections.
MULTI PC
MODE
Select this item to display a dialog.
Use the dialog to change the display mode as
explained below.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
71
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
• To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode,
select one of computers in the dialog using the
▲/▼/◄/► buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT
button.
Press the ► button to choose OK, and then press
ENTER or INPUT again. The image for the selected
computer is displayed on full screen.
• To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode,
press ► button to choose OK in the dialog and press
the ENTER or INPUT button.
The display mode is changed.
•
For details on how to switch
MULTI PC
MODE
(continued)
the display mode to Multi PC
mode on your computer, see
the section 2.1.3 Switching the
display mode in the Network Guide.
• The Presenter mode setting of the selected
computer becomes valid when the display mode is
changed to Single PC mode.
PRESENTATION
(continued)
Also, the Presenter mode setting
becomes invalid when the
display mode is changed to Multi
PC mode, regardless the setting
on the computers.
For details, see the section 2.2.2 Presenter mode in
the Network Guide.
Selecting this item displays the user name. This
function helps you identify from which computer the
current image is sent.
• You can set user names for each computer on
“LiveViwer”.
DISPLAY
USER NAME
For details, see the section 2.2.3 Display User Name
in the Network Guide.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
72
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NETWORK menu
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the NETWORK_INFORMATION dialog
for confirming the network settings.
INFORMATION
• For the details of PASSCODE, see the section 1.5 Selecting the
network connection method in the Network Guide.
• Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed.
•
When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock
decreases, the set time may become incorrect even though accurate
date and time are input. Replace the battery suitably (93).
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate
“0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten
address from DHCP server.
Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions.
Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button ►.
Then use the button ► to execute.
SERVICE
Network will be once cut off when choose restart.
If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.
After selecting RESTART EXECUTE, NETWORK menu may not be
controlled approx. 30 seconds.
ViewSonic
73
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
SECURITY menu
This projector is equipped with security functions.
From the SECURITY menu, items shown in the table
below can be performed.
To use SECURITY menu: User registration is required
before using the security functions.
Enter to the SECURITY menu
1. Press the ► button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed.
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the registered password. The
factory default password is as follows.
Pro9500: 4501
This password can be changed. Move the cursor to the right side of
the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the ► button to display the
SECURITY menu.
• It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be
changed as soon as possible.
• If an incorrect password is input, the ENTER PASSWORD box
will be displayed again. If incorrect password is input 3 times, the
projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time
an incorrect password is input.
3. Items shown in the table below can be performed.
If you have forgotten your password
(1) While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed, press and hold the
RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press
and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ►
button on the projector.
(2) The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. Contact your dealer
with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after
your user registration information is confirmed.
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from (1).
Item
Description
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
and press the ► button to display the ENTER
NEW PASSWORD box.
(2) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new password.
(3) Move the cursor to the right side of the
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the
► button to display the NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN box, enter the same password again.
(4) Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ►
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box
will be displayed for about 30 seconds, please
make note of the password during this time.
SECURITY
PASSWORD
CHANGE
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or
►
button on the
projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box.
• Please do not forget your password.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
74
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
Item
Description
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image
from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the ►
button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/
off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON.
The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
will be displayed.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
PASSWORD again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
please make note of the password during
this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
MyScreen
PASSWORD
projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
When a password is set for MyScreen:
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.
The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable.
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be
•
•
•
unavailable).
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these
functions.
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.
•
2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input, the menu will
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
75
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
Item
Description
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless
a registered Code is input.
1 Turning on the PIN LOCK
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select PIN LOCK and press the ► button or the
ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on/off
menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/
off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN
Code box will be displayed.
1-3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the ▲/▼/◄/►,
COMPUTER or INPUT button.
The PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter
the same PIN code. This will complete the PIN
code registration.
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds
while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed,
the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 1-1.
•
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off
the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code.
The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code. If an
incorrect PIN code is input, the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input. The
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the Enter PIN code box is displayed.
PIN LOCK
This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power
is turned off.
Please do not forget your PIN code.
•
2 Turning off the PIN LOCK
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.
2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be
displayed.
Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.
If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off.
3 If you have forgotten your PIN code
3-1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed, press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3
seconds while pressing the ► button on the projector.
The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.
If there is no key input for about 5 minutes
while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the
•
projector will turn off.
3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your PIN code will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
76
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
Item
Description
If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of
the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector
is turned on is different than the previously recorded, the
TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed
and the projector will not display the input signal.
• To display the signal again, set this function OFF.
• After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON
alarm, the lamp will turn off.
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition
Detector function is on.
1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press
the ► or the ENTER button to display the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION
DETECTOR on/off menu to select ON. Select
ON and the current angle and MIRROR
setting will be recorded. The ENTER NEW
PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same
password again.
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
the ► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds,
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
please make note of the password during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the
►
button on the
projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
• Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password.
• This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off
the AC power.
• This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable
position when ON is selected.
2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered
password and the screen will return to the
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will
ENTER PASSWORD box
close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1.
(large)
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
77
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
Item
Description
The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being
overwritten. When the password is set for the MY TEXT;
• The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable, which can prohibit
changing the DISPLAY setting.
• The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable, which can prevent the
MY TEXT from being overwritten.
1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD
1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the
► button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD
on/off menu.
1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT
PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will
be displayed.
1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
password. Move the cursor to the right side
of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small)
and press the ► button to display the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN box, and then enter the
same password again.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
box (small)
1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press
► button to display the NOTE NEW
PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, then
please make note of the password during
this time.
MY TEXT
PASSWORD
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the
projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu.
2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD
2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER
PASSWORD box (large). Enter the
registered password and the screen will
return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
ENTER PASSWORD box
(large)
If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close.
If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1
3 If you have forgotten your password
3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off
menu.
3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit
inquiring code will be displayed inside the box.
3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code. Your password will
be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
78
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY menu
Item
Description
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the ► or
ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY
on/off menu.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu to select
on or off.
MY TEXT
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
ó
When it is set ON, the MY TEXT will be displayed
on the START UP screen and the INPUT_
INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the
SERVICE menu is chosen.
• This function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to the OFF.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the
SECURITY menu to select the MY
TEXT WRITING and press the ►
button. The MY TEXT WRITING dialog
will be displayed.
(2) The current MY TEXT will be displayed
on the first 3 lines. If not yet written, the
lines will be blank.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the
ENTER or INPUT button to select and
enter characters. To erase 1 character
at one time, press the RESET button or
press the ◄ and INPUT button at the
same time. Also if you move the cursor
to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen
and press the ENTER or INPUT button,
1 character or all characters will be
erased. The MY TEXT can be input up
to 24 characters on each line.
MY TEXT
WRITING
(3) To change an already inserted character,
press the ▲/▼ button to move the
cursor to one of the first 3 lines, and use
the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on
the character to be changed.
After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected.
Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above.
(4) To finish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press
the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous MY TEXT
without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and
press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button.
The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT
PASSWORD function is set to OFF.
•
Selecting this item displays the SECURITY INDICATOR dialog. Use the
▲/▼ buttons to select ON or OFF.
SECURITY
INDICATOR
ON
OFF
ó
When ON is selected while PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON,
the SECURITY indicator blinks in the standby state (73, 74).
Selecting this item displays the STACK LOCK dialog. For more information,
please see Instant Stack Guide.
STACK LOCK
ViewSonic
79
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on-screen presentations
easily and quickly:
- PC-LESS Presentation
- USB Display
PC-LESS Presentation
The PC-LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into
the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes.
The PC-LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source.
This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer.
- Thumbnail mode
- Full Screen mode
- Slideshow mode
[Supported storage media]
• USB memory (USB memory type, USB hard disk and USB card reader type)
NOTE • USB readers (adapters) that have more than one USB slot may not
work (if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected).
• USB hubs may not work.
• USB devices with security software may not work.
• Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device.
[Supported format]
• FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32
NOTE • NTFS is not supported.
[Supported file format]
• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not supported.
• Bitmap (.bmp)
• PNG (.png)
• GIF (.gif)
* 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported.
* Interlace PNG is not supported.
NOTE • Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported.
Pro9500: 1024X768
• Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported.
• Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed.
• Some supported files may not be displayed.
• Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in
the Thumbnail mode.
ViewSonic
80
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Thumbnail mode
The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the
Thumbnail screen. Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen.
If you wish, you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode, after you
select some images in the Thumbnail mode.
The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC-LESS
Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source.
Thumbnail menu
Selected image
Thumbnail images
ViewSonic
81
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Operating by buttons or keys
You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or
keypad or a web browser software. The following functions can be supported
while the Thumbnail is displayed.
Button operation
Functions
The keypad on
the projector
Web Remote in web
browser software.
The remote
control
▲/▼/◄/►
▲/▼/◄/►
▲/▼/◄/►
Move cursor
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
-
Switches pages
• Displays the selected
image on the Full Screen
mode when a cursor is
on a thumbnail image.
• Displays the SETUP
menu for the selected
image when a cursor is
on a thumbnail image
number.
ENTER
INPUT
ENTER
The SETUP menu for the selected image
Item
SETUP
Functions
Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the
► cursor button to execute the functions as follows.
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
RETURN
START
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.
txt” file.
Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the
Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.
txt” file.
STOP
SKIP
Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow. This
setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” file.
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected
ROTATE image 90 degrees clockwise. This setting information will be
saved in the “playlist.txt” file.
ViewSonic
82
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen
You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen.
Item
Functions
Moves to an upper folder.
SORT
Allows you to sort files and folders as following.
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
RETURN
NAME UP
Sorts in ascending order by file name.
NAME DOWN Sorts in descending order by file name.
DATE UP
Sorts in ascending order by file date.
Sorts in descending order.by file date.
Go to previous / next page.
DATE DOWN
▲/▼
SLIDESHOW
Configures and starts the Slideshow.
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail
screen.
RETURN
PLAY
START
Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow.
Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow.
Sets the end number of the Slideshow.
Sets the interval time of the Slideshow.
Selects the Slideshow mode.
STOP
INTERVAL
PLAY MODE
INPUT
Switches the input port.
MENU
Displays the menu.
Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device
from the projector. After that, the projector will not recognize a
USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A
input port.
REMOVE USB
ViewSonic
83
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1 page as maximum.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
• Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail.
This file seems to be broken or not supported format.
A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is
indicated by a file format icon.
ViewSonic
84
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Full Screen Mode
The Full Screen mode shows a full display image. To display in Full Screen mode,
select an image in the Thumbnail screen. Then press the ENTER button on the
remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad, or click [ENTER] on the Web
Remote Control.
Full screen display
The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode.
Button operation
The keypad
on the
projector
Web Remote
in web browser
software.
Functions
The remote
control
▼
►
or
▼
►
or
▼
or
►
Shows the next picture.
PAGE DOWN
PAGE DOWN
▲
◄
or
▲
◄
or
▲
or
◄
Shows the previous picture.
Displays Thumbnail.
PAGE UP
PAGE UP
ENTER
INPUT
ENTER
NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
• It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the
Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
ViewSonic
85
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Slideshow mode
The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at
intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu.
You can start this function from the Slideshow menu. To display the Slideshow
menu, select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the
ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector.
The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed.
Button operation
The keypad
on the
projector
Web Remote
in web browser
software.
Functions
The remote
control
ENTER
INPUT
ENTER
Displays thumbnail
* These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed.
NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button
when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed.
• When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME, the last slide of the
presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control
or Web Remote Control, or INPUT button on the projector is pushed.
ViewSonic
86
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration.
Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail.
1) RETURN
2) PLAY
: Returns to the thumbnail mode.
: Play the Slideshow.
3) START
:
Set the beginning number of the
Slideshow.
4) STOP
5) INTERVAL
: Set the end number of the Slideshow.
: Set the interval time of the Slideshow.
It is not recommend to set the interval
time very short something like several
seconds, because it may take more than
several seconds to read and display an
image file if it is stored in very deep layer
directory or if so many files are stored in
the same directory.
6) PLAY MODE : Select the Slideshow mode.
ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one
time.
ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless.
NOTE • The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the “playlist.txt” file
that is stored in the storage media. If the file is not existed, it is generated
automatically.
• The settings for the START, STOP, INTERVAL, and PLAY MODE are saved to
the Playlist.
• If the storage media is under the write protection or the “playlist.txt” is the
read only type file, it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow.
ViewSonic
87
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
PC-LESS Presentation (continued)
Playlist
The Playlist is a DOS format text file, which decides the order of displayed still
image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow.
The playlist file name is “playlist.txt” and it can be edited on a computer.
It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC-LESS
Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured.
[Example of “playlist.txt” files]
START setting : STOP setting : INTERVAL setting : PLAY MODE setting :
img001.jpg: : : :
img002.jpg:600: : :
img003.jpg:700:rot1: :
img004.jpg: : :SKIP:
img005.jpg:1000:rot2:SKIP:
The “playlist.txt” file contains the following information.
Each piece of information requires to be separated by “:”, and “:” at the end of each line.
1st line: START, STOP, INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings.
2nd line and after: file name, interval time, rotation setting and skip setting.
interval time: It can be set from 0 to 999900 (ms) with an increment of 100 (ms).
rotation setting: “rot1” means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise; “rot2” and
“rot3” increase another 90 degrees in order.
skip setting: “SKIP” means that the image will not be displayed in the
Slideshow.
NOTE • The maximum length in a line on the "playlist.txt" file is 255 characters
including linefeed. If any line exceeds the limit, the "playlist.txt" file becomes invalid.
•
Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist. However, if some folders exist in
the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders.
Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow.
•
If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space, the “playlist.txt”
file cannot be created.
• For the Slideshow settings, refer to the section Slideshow mode.
ViewSonic
88
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
USB Display
The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable.
Hardware and software requirement for computer
• OS: One of the following. (32 bit version only)
Windows ® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition
Windows Vista ® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise
Windows ® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional / Ultimate /Enterprise
• CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
• Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
• Memory: 512 MB or higher
• Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher
• USB Port
• USB cable : 1 piece
Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu. When you
connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable, the
projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your computer. Then, the software in the
projector, “LiveViewerLiteForUSB.exe”, will run automatically and the application, “LiveViewer
Lite for USB”, will be ready on your computer for the USB Display. The application,
“LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will be automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged.
NOTE • If the software does not start automatically (this is typically because
CD-ROM autorun is disabled on your OS), follow the instructions below.
(1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the “Run”
(2) Enter F:\LiveViewerLiteForUSB.exe and then press the [OK]
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive F on your computer, you will need to
replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive.
• CD-ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running.
•
The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password-
protected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit the screen saver.
• Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual.
Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating.
This application will appear in the Windows notification
area once it starts. You can quit the application from
your computer by selecting “Quit” on the menu.
NOTE • The “LiveViewer” (refer to the
Network Guide) and this application cannot
be used at the same time. If you connect your
computer to the projector by using a USB cable
while the “LiveViewer” is running, the following message will be displayed.
• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your
computer, make the firwall function invalid with following the user's manual.
• Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the
security software setting to allow the use of "LiveViewer Lite for USB".
ViewSonic
89
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
USB Display (continued)
Right-Click menu
The menu shown in the right will be displayed
when you right-click the application icon in the
Windows notification area.
Display : The Floating menu is displayed, and the icon disappears from the
Windows notification area.
Quit
: The application is closed, and the icon disappears from the Windows
notification area.
NOTE • If you wish to restart the application, you need to unplug the USB
cable and plug it again.
Floating menu
If you select “Display” on the Right-Click
menu, the Floating menu shown in the right
will appear on your computer screen.
Start capture button
The transmission to the projector is started
and the images will be displayed.
Stop button
The image transmission is stopped.
Hold button
The image on the projector’s screen is temporally frozen. The last image before
the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data
on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen.
Option button
The Options window is displayed.
Minimize button
The Floating menu is closed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notification
area.
NOTE • If you click the Start capture button and/or Stop button repeatedly,
images may not be displayed on the screen.
ViewSonic
90
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation tools
USB Display (continued)
Options window
If you select the Option button on the Floating
menu, the Options window is displayed.
Optimize Performance
The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures screenshots in JPEG data and
sends them to the projector. The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has two options
that have different compression rate of JPEG data.
Transmission speed
Speed takes priority over Image quality.
It makes JPEG compression rate higher.
The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the
transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.
Image quality
Image quality takes priority over Speed.
It makes JPEG compression rate lower.
The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred
data is larger, but the image quality is better.
Keep PC resolution
If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen
resolution of your computer will be switched as follows, and the display speed
may be faster.
Pro9500: 1024X768 (XGA)
If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above, a
smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported
by the computer will be selected.
NOTE • When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on
computer desktop screen may be changed.
About
The version information of the “LiveViewer Lite for USB”.
ViewSonic
91
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Replacing the lamp
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare
a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Type number : RLC-063 (DT01175)
lamp cover
Replacing the lamp
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
1.
Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on
a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the
dealer to replace the lamp.
2.
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure.
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp
3.
cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the
side to remove it.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp,
and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles. Never
loosen any other screws.
4.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the 3
screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous
process to lock it in place.
5.
Handles
While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover
and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in
place. Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover.
6.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using
the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
7.
(2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using
the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu
using the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button.
(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear.
(5) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time.
CAUTION ►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp
is taken out.
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
ViewSonic
92
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Replacing the lamp (continued)
Lamp warning
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp
can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or
worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or
burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible
for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and
dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US).
• For product disposal, consult your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
•
If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out
from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp.
outlet
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not
meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire, damage or
shorten the life of this product.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative.
•
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst.
When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the
lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
ViewSonic
93
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Cleaning and replacing the air filter
Please check and clean the air filter periodically. When the indicators or a
message prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible.
The air filter of this projector consists of a filter cover and a filter unit with two
types of filter. If one or both of the filters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace
the filter unit with a new one.
The specified filter unit also comes with a
replacement lamp for this projector. Please replace
the filter unit as well when you replace the lamp.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power
1.
cord. Allow the projector to sufficiently cool
down.
Filter cover
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the
filter cover.
2.
Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to
take it off.
Filter cover
knobs
3.
Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to
unlock the bottom side of the filter unit. Pull
the center knob to take the filter unit off.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Filter unit
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of
the projector and the outer side of the filter
unit.
Filter unit
knobs
The filter unit consists of two parts. Press
down around the interlocking parts to
unlock, then separate the two parts.
Interlocking
parts
Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side of
each part of the filter unit to clean them up.
If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled,
replace them with the new ones.
Combine the two parts to reassemble the
filter unit.
8.
9.
Put the filter unit back into the projector.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
94
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Cleaning and replacing the air filter (continued)
10.Put the filter cover back into the place.
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in
the EASY MENU.
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
11.
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, then press the
► cursor (or the ENTER / the RESET) button. A dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ► cursor button to select the “OK” on the dialog. It performs
resetting the filter time.
► Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cable
WARNING
is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
►Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the
air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector.
►Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to
the projector.
NOTE
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as the “CHECK THE AIR
FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
ViewSonic
95
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Replacing the internal clock battery
This projector has internal clock that uses a battery. When
the clock of the network function does not work correctly,
please try solution by replacement of the battery: HITACHI
MAXELL, part number CR2032 or CR2032H.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow
the projector to cool sufficiently.
1.
After making sure that the projector has cooled
adequately, slowly turn over the projector, so that the
bottom is facing.
Raised dot
Knob
2.
Battery
Cover
There is a raised dot near the battery cover at the
3.
CLOSE
bottom of the projector. Turn the cover in the direction
indicated OPEN to position one end of the slit on the
cover with the dot, using a coin or the like. And then
pick the cover up to remove it.
O P E C N L O S E
Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the
4.
like to take it out. While prying it up, put a finger lightly
on the battery since it may pop out of the holder.
Battery
Replace with a new battery of the specified type. With
5.
the plus side facing up, slide the battery under the claw
of the spring fitting. And press down on the battery until
it snaps into place.
Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the
6.
direction indicated CLOSE to position the knob of the
cover with the dot on the bottom case to fix the cover,
using a coin or the like.
S E
O P E N
NOTE • The internal clock will be initialized by removing the battery. For
setting the clock, see the Network Guide.
WARNING ►Be careful of handling a battery, as a battery can cause explosion,
cracking or leakage, which could result in a fire, an injury, and environment pollution.
• Use only the specified and perfect battery. Do not use a battery with damage,
such as a scratch, a dent, rust or leakage.
• When replacing the battery, replace it with a new battery.
•
When a battery leaked, wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth. If the leakage
adhered to your body, immediately rinse it well with water. When a battery leaked in
the battery holder, replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Do not work on a battery; for example recharging or soldering.
•
•
Keep a battery in a dark, cool and dry place. Never expose a battery to a fire or water.
Keep a battery away from children and pets. Be careful for them not to swallow a
battery. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
• Obey the local laws on disposing a battery.
ViewSonic
96
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Other care
Inside of the projector
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and
inspected by your dealer about once every year.
Caring for the lens
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
1.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens
directly with your hand.
2.
Caring for the cabinet and remote control
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,
etc.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
1.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze
or a soft cloth.
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a
soft, dry cloth.
2.
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in,
and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. The care in a high temperature
state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so
dangerous.
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result in
a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the projector.
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.
CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
NOTICE ►Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands.
ViewSonic
97
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately.
WARNING
►
Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as smoke,
strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration
of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases, immediately disconnect
the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has
stopped, contact to your dealer or service company.
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and measures are
recommended before requesting repair.
If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service company. They
will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
Related messages
When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following table.
Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes, it will
be reappeared every time the power is turned on.
Message
Description
There is no input signal.
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status
of the signal source.
The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input
source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B
.
Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture
input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you cannot use
the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select
other port for picture input.
Projector is waiting for an image file.
Check the hardware connection, settings on the projector
and network-related settings.
The computer-Projector network connection might be
disconnected. Please re-connect using “Connect button”
of the “LiveViewer”. (2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” in the
Network Guide)
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is
not within the specified range.
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
An improper signal is input.
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
source specs.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
98
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Related messages (continued)
Message
Description
The internal temperature is rising.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the
following items, please turn the power ON again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
• Is the setting for FAN SPEED appropriate?
For details on FAN SPEED, refer to FAN SPEED of
SERVICE in the OPTION menu. If the projector is used with
a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself
or the parts inside.
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change
the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the
air filter section of this manual. After you have cleaned or
changed the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer.
The button operation is not available.
ViewSonic
99
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps
When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual,
check and cope with it according to the following table.
For the SECURITY indicator, see SECURITY INDICATOR in the SECURITY menu.
POWER
LAMP
TEMP
Description
indicator indicator indicator
Lighting
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in a standby state.
Please refer to the section “Power on/off”.
Blinking
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is warming up.
Please wait.
Lighting
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in an on state.
Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is cooling down.
Please wait.
The projector is cooling down. A certain error
has been detected.
Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking,
and then perform the proper measure using the item
descriptions below.
Blinking
In Red
(discre- (discre-
tionary) tionary)
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility
that interior portion has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Lighting Turned the following items, and then turn the power on again.
In Red
off
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please change the lamp referring to the section
Replacing the lamp.
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Blinking Turned sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
In Red
off
the attachment state of the lamp cover. After performing
any needed maintenance, turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
The cooling fan is not operating.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Turned Blinking sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
off
In Red that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,
etc., and then turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
(Continued on next page)
ViewSonic
100
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
POWER
indicator indicator indicator
LAMP
TEMP
Description
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least
20 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make
confirmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again.
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Turned Lighting • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
off
In Red • Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
• Is the setting for FAN SPEED appropriate?
For details on FAN SPEED, refer to FAN SPEED of SERVICE in the
OPTION menu. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may
cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside.
It is time to clean the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change the
air filter referring to the section Cleaning and replacing the air
filter. After cleaning or changing the air filter, please be sure to
reset the filter timer. After the remedy, reset the power to ON.
Lighting
In Green
Simultaneous
blinking in Red
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become overcooled.
Please use the unit within the usage temperature
parameters (5°C to 35°C).
Lighting
In Green
Alternative
blinking in Red
After the treatment, reset the power to ON.
Blinking In
Green for Turned
At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the
Turned projector.
approx. 3
seconds.
off
off
Please refer to 3.7 Schedule Settings in the Network
Guide.
NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety purposes,
the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps may also be
turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at least 45 minutes.
After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the
attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.
Shutting the projector down
Shutdown switch
Only when the projector can not be turned off by usual
procedure, please push the shutdown switch using a pin
or similar, and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet. Before turning it on again, wait at least 10 minutes
to make the projector cool down enough.
Resetting all settings
When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function of
SERVICE item in OPTION menu can reset all settings (except settings such as
LANGUAGE, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, SECURITY and
NETWORK) to the factory default.
ViewSonic
101
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it
according to the following table.
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.
Correctly connect the power cord.
15
The main power source has been interrupted during
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.
Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet,
and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes,
then turn the power on again.
15
89
Power does not
come on.
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either
of these has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off and disconnect the power
plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and
then turn the power on again.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
10 ~ 14
–
Signal source does not correctly work.
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to
the manual of the source device.
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
The input changeover settings are mismatched.
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.
19 ~ 21
The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE
function for sounds are working.
19, 28,
100
AV MUTE may be active.
Refer to the item “Sound does not come out” and “No
pictures are displayed” on the next page to turn off the
MUTE and BLANK functions.
(Continued on next page)
ViewSonic
102
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the audio cables.
10 ~ 14
The MUTE function is working.
19
Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME +/- button
on the remote control.
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function
or the remote control.
Sound does not
come out.
19, 46,
47
The AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER setting is not correct.
Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER in AUDIO menu.
46
47
The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable.
Check each of the two modes provided and select the
suitable one for your HDMITM audio device.
The lens cover is attached.
Remove the lens cover.
4, 18
10 ~ 14
33
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function.
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor.
10
28
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play
monitor using another plug and play monitor.
The BLANK screen is displayed.
Press BLANK button on the remote control.
No pictures are
displayed.
The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input
source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B.
Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to
project the picture input to the port. Otherwise select other
port for picture input.
55
The projector does not recognize the USB storage
device inserted into USB TYPE A port.
Use the REMOVE USB function first, remove the USB
storage device, and then insert it into the port again.
Before removing the USB storage device, be sure to use
the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen, which
appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input
source.
12, 80
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
103
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The FREEZE function is working.
Video screen
display freezes.
28
Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP, COLOR,
TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings, using the menu functions.
Colors have a
faded- out
appearance, or
Color tone is
poor.
34, 39
39
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,
SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601.
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an
extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a
higher level using the menu function.
33
Pictures appear
dark.
The projector is operating in Eco mode.
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO MODE to
OFF, in the SETUP menu.
44
The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime.
Replace the lamp.
89 ~ 90
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are
not properly adjusted.
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE
using the menu function.
23, 38
94
Pictures appear
blurry.
The lens is dirty or misty.
Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the lens.
When the projector is operating in Eco mode, flickering
may appear on screen.
Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO MODE to
OFF, in the SETUP menu.
44
Some kind
of image
degradation
such as
The OVER SCAN ratio is too big.
Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller.
36
39
flickering or
stripes appear
on screen.
Excessive VIDEO NR.
Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu.
The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current
input signal.
41
Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
104
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The computer
The computer cannot start up in the current hardware
connected to the configuration.
USBTYPEBport
of the projector
12
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then
reconnect it after starting up the computer.
does not start up.
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.
45
61
45
61
45
RS-232C does
not work.
The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is
set to NETWORK BRIDGE.
Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the
OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.
Network does
not work
NETWORK
BRIDGE
function does
not work
The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off.
Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE
item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu.
The SAVING function is working.
Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu.
Schedule function
does not work
Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector
is working properly.
When the
projector is
connected to the
network, it powers
off and on as
described below.
Powers off
If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network,
there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs
within the network, as explained below.
-
There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network.
- Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables.
This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs.
–
-
POWER indicator
blinks in orange a
few times
Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector
as well as the other network devices.
Check the network connection and remove the loop by
disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one
connecting cable between two hubs.
Goes into
standby mode
Video files cannot
be played properly
on a computer
on which the
"LiveViewer" was
run.
The "LiveViewer" has been intentionally or accidentally
forced to shut down.
DirectDraw® or Direct3D® has been disabled on your Windows®
.
–
Please refer to the Microsoft® Help and Support home
page on how to enable DirectDraw® or Direct3D®.
NOTE
• Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or
imply a machine defect.
ViewSonic
105
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications
Item
Specification
Product name
Liquid crystal projector
Liquid Crystal
Panel
786,432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical)
Lamp
245 W UHP
Speaker
16 W mono (8 W x2)
Power supply/
Rated current
Power
consumption
Temperature
range
AC100-120 V: 4.0 A, AC220-240 V: 2.0 A
AC100-120 V: 380 W, AC220-240 V: 360 W
5 ~ 35 °C (Operating)
401 (W) x 103 (H) x 318 (D) mm
* Not including protruding parts.
Size
Weight (mass) approx. 4.6 kg
COMPUTER IN1 .......................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
COMPUTER IN2 (H, V, G/Y, B/Cb/Pb, R/Cr/Pr) ... BNC jack x5
HDMI ...................................................... HDMI connector x1
MONOTOR OUT ........................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1
COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) ....................... RCA jack x3
S-VIDEO ............................................. Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1
VIDEO ............................................................... RCA jack x1
AUDIO IN1 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN2 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
AUDIO IN3 (R, L) .............................................. RCA jack x2
AUDIO OUT (R, L) ............................................ RCA jack x2
USB TYPE A ................................. USB type A connector x1
USB TYPE B ................................. USB type B connector x1
CONTROL .............................................. D-sub 9 pin plug x1
LAN .................................................................. RJ45 jack x1
MIC ............................................ 3.5 mm (mono) mini jack x1
REMOTE CONTROL ............... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1
Ports
Lamp: RLC-063 (DT01175)
* For more information, please consult your dealer.
Optional parts
ViewSonic
106
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[unit: mm]
ViewSonic
107
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
Network Guide
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements
1.1.1 Required equipment preparation
The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer
through the network.
ü Projector
ü LAN cable (to connect the projector to a network): CAT-5 or greater
ü Computer (minimum 1 set): equipped with the network feature
(100Base-TX or 10Base-T)
1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer
The “LiveViewer” software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect
to the projector through a network. To use the “LiveViewer” your computer needs
to meet the following requirements.
ü OS: One of the following.
Windows ® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition (32 bit version only)
Windows Vista ® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise (32
bit version only)
Windows ® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate /
Enterprise (32 bit version only)
ü CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
ü Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher
* When using the “LiveViewer” it is recommended that the display resolution of
your computer is set to 1024 x 768.
ü Memory: 512 MB or higher
ü Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher
® 6.0 or higher
ü Web browser: Internet Explorer
ü CD-ROM drive
NOTE • The network communication control is disabled while the projector is
in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING. Please
connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY
MODE to NORMAL. (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
• You can get the latest version of the “LiveViewer” and the latest information
for this product from our website.
• Depending on the specification of your computer, the computer may slow
down due to high CPU usage when the “LiveViewer” is running.
• The “LiveViewer” does not work on Windows Vista® that is not updated to
Service Pack 1 or later. Please install the latest Service Pack on your Windows
Vista®.
ViewSonic
108
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.1 System requirements (continued)
NOTE • Referring to the manual of your computer or Windows, select the
following or a smaller display resolution for the computer.
1024 x 768 (XGA)
When a resolution larger than the specified resolution is selected, the projector
will convert and display in the specified resolution, and the display speed
may become faster. If your computer does not support the display resolution
specified above, a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions
that are supported by the computer will be selected.
• Images might not been transmitted, caused by OS version or the driver
software for Network Adapter on your computers. It is highly recommended that
OS and the driver should be updated to the latest.
• If any application software having the firewall function is installed into you
computer, make the firewall function invalid with following the user’s manual.
ViewSonic
109
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Installing the “LiveViewer”
1.2.1 Installing the “LiveViewer”
The “LiveViewer” software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect
to the projector through a network.
You need to log in as an administrator user to install the software.
1) Turn on the computer.
2) Shut down all applications.
3) Insert the accompanying CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.
4) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the “Run”.
5) Enter E:\Application\LiveViewer\LiveViewer_Setup.exe and then press the [OK].
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive E on your computer, you will need to
replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive.
6) After a moment, the Choose Setup Language
dialog will appear as shown on the right. Select
what you like to use in the list, and click the [OK].
If the software has been already installed, Uninstallation will be done. Click
the [Cancel] button, then uninstallation will be canceled. If you uninstalled the
software by miss-operation, please re-install the software from first procedure.
7) After a moment, the Welcome dialog will appear
as shown on the right. Press the [Next].
ViewSonic
110
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.2 Installing the “LiveViewer” (continued)
8) The License Agreement dialog appears. If
you accept it, select “I accept the terms of the
license agreement” and press the [Next].
9) The Choose Destination Location dialog
appears. Press the [Next].
NOTE • The C:\Program Files\Projector
Tools\LiveViewer folder will be created and
the program will be installed into that folder. If
you wish to install to a different folder, click the
[Browse] and select another folder.
10) Confirm the program folder name. If “Projector
Tools” is okay, press the [Next] to continue.
If not, enter the desired folder name and then
press the [Next].
11) [Windows ® XP]
The Hardware Installation dialog appears if
you are using Windows ® XP. Press Continue
Anyway.
[Windows Vista ® or Windows ® 7]
The Windows Security dialog will appear if
you are using Windows Vista ® or Windows ®
7. Please click the [Install this driver
software anyway] and continue installation.
12) After a moment, installation will complete
and the Setup Complete dialog will appear as
shown on the right. Click the [Finish]. This
completes the software installation. Then your
computer automatically restarts.
(1) To confirm that the software has been
properly installed, press the [Start] button
on the toolbar, select All Programs and then
select the Projector Tools folder.
(2) The “LiveViewer” will appear in that folder
if the installation was successful.
ViewSonic
111
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Process to connect the network
Before connecting your computer and projector via a network, make sure that
the LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector. (Operating in the
Operating Guide) Otherwise a connection cannot be established.
1.3.1 Process overview
An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a
network is shown below.
The “LiveViewer” allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish a
network connection quickly and easily.
If My Connection is
selected
Selecting the network connection mode
- Wireless LAN
- Wired LAN
- My Connection
Selecting the network connection method
- Enter PassCode
If Enter PassCode or
Select From List is
selected
- Configure Manually
- Select From List
Manual configuration
- Profile
- History
If Profile or History is
selected
- Configure Network Settings Manually
Configuring the network settings manually
Confirming the connection to your destination
NOTE • Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert
wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector.
• Up to 30 computers can be simultaneously connected to the projector through
a network.
ViewSonic
112
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.3 Process to connect the network (continued)
1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”
Start the “LiveViewer” in your computer, taking one of the followings.
● Double click the “LiveViewer” icon on the Desktop in your computer
● Select “Start” → “All Programs” → “Projector Tools” → “LiveViewer” on
Windows menu.
Then, proceed to item 1.4 Selecting the network connection mode.
ViewSonic
113
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Selecting the network connection mode
After starting the “LiveViewer”, the “Select the
Network Connection” screen comes up.
Select the network connection that you would like
to use. There are 3 options in the menu.
• Wireless LAN
• Wired LAN
• My Connection
If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN, proceed to item 1.4.1 Selecting either
the wireless LAN or wired LAN.
If you select My Connection, jump to item 1.4.2 Selecting My Connection.
NOTE
• Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access
point via wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired
network, since the projector doesn't have wireless LAN function.
1.4.1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN
If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN,
a list of the network adapters in your computer is
shown in the menu.
Select what you like to use in the list, and click the
[Next].
Then, proceed to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
NOTE
• If you select the wireless LAN, the wireless LAN adapters in your computer
are shown in the list.
• If the wired LAN is selected, the wired LAN adapters in your computer are shown.
[Troubleshooting]
n Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter?
The screen is displayed in the case that the
selected network adapter is invalid.
• To turn it on, click the [Yes], and then proceed
to item 1.5.
• Not to turn it on, click the [No], and then the
screen is back to the previous one to select
another network adapter.
ViewSonic
114
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)
n A network connection was not established.
The screen is displayed in the case that the
projector is not connected with a LAN cable
to your computer when the wired LAN is
selected.
Be sure that the projector is connected with
a LAN cable to your computer.
Click the [OK], then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network
connection mode.
ViewSonic
115
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)
1.4.2 Selecting My Connection
Select the [My Connection] and click the
[Connect].
If you select the My Connection, the computer
is connected to the projector through the
network by using the profile data that is pre-
assigned to My Connection.
When you select the My Connection, the
computer immediately starts the connection to
the projector.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
NOTE • If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection
between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address
may be varied. If you like to use the My Connection, set the DHCP off in the
projector.
• If no profile data is assigned to the My Connection, it can’t be used.
[Troubleshooting]
n A network connection could not be established.
Windows prevented network configuration
changes.
You may log in the Windows under User
authority.
Click the [OK] to return to the screen to
select the network connection mode.
Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator
authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”.
ViewSonic
116
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.4 Selecting the network connection mode (continued)
n Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?
The message is appeared when the
wireless adapter you selected is already
used for another network connection.
• To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to
item 1.8 Confirming the connection to
your destination.
• Not to connect, click the [No] to return to
the screen to select the network connection
mode.
ViewSonic
117
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method
There are some options to connect to the
network.
• Enter PassCode
• Configure Manually
• Select From List
Select one of them to meet your requirement.
Enter PassCode
If you want to use the Passcode for network connection, select the [Enter
PassCode] and click the [Next].
The Passcode is given by the projector on screen. And you simply input the
Passcode to the “LiveViewer” to connect the network.
Proceed to item 1.5.1 Passcode connection.
Configure Manually
Select the [Configure Manually] and click the [Next].
Then, proceed to item 1.6 Manual Configuration.
Select From List
Before selecting this item, your computer and the projectors need to be connected
to the same network.
If the connection is already established, select the [Select From List].
From the list of the projectors connected to the network, select which projector
you would like to send your images. Proceed to 1.8 Confirming the connection
to your destination.
ViewSonic
118
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
1.5.1 Passcode connection
The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the
network.
The Passcode is a code that expresses the network setting in the projector. If you
input the code in the “LiveViewer” in your computer, the network setting in the projector
and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately.
The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode.
(1) Getting the Passcode
The Passcode is 12-digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters (“1-9” and
“A-Z”).
Example: PASSCODE 1234-5678-9ABC
The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input
source.
NOTE • The Passcode system does not work under the condition below. If
such is the case, establish the connection manually.
1) Subnet mask is not Class A or B or C.
The Passcode system accepts Class A, B and C only.
Class A:(255.0.0.0), ClassB:(255.255.0.0), Class C:(255.255.255.0)
There are two methods to get the Passcode from the projector
Method 1
1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.
2) Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the
projector to select the LAN as input port.
If there is no signal on the LAN port, you can find the Passcode on screen.
ViewSonic
119
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
Method 2
1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.
2) Press the MENU button on the remote control or the ▲/▼ buttons on the
projector to show the menu on screen.
3) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the “ADVANCED MENU”, and use the
► cursor button to enter the item.
4) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the NETWORK, and use the ► cursor
button to enter the item.
5) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION, and use the ►
cursor button to display the INFORMATION.
6) The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window.
NOTE • Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the
“LiveViewer”, or when the LAN port is not selected as input source.
•
If no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes, the
Passcode will be changed.
ViewSonic
120
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
(2) Entering the Passcode
If you select [Enter PassCode] at item 1.5,
the “Please enter the PassCode” screen is
displayed. Please enter the Passcode divided
4-digit each in 3 boxes (total 12-digit).
Example PASSCODE: 1234 - 5678 - 9ABC
After entering the Passcode, click the [Connect] to start the connection to the
projector.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
If you click the [Back], the screen is back to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
NOTE • When entering the Passcode, capital and small letters are not
distinguished.
• If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C, you will have to
establish the connection manually.
If the manual setting screen is displayed, please follow item 1.5.1 (3).
[Troubleshooting]
n Incorrect PassCode.
The incorrect Passcode was input.
Click the [Back] to return to the “Please
enter the PassCode” screen.
Check the PassCode on the projector
screen and enter the code again.
ViewSonic
121
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
n A network connection could not be established.
Windows prevented network configuration
changes.
You may log in the Windows under User
authority.
Click the [OK], then the “LiveViewer” main
menu is displayed even though the network
is not established. Click
on the main and
go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
Consult to the network administrator. Log in the Windows under Administrator
authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”.
n If you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the
projector.
This dialog will be displayed when you
need to add a Network configuration on
your computer to connect to the projector.
Confirm with your network administrator if
the Network configuration displayed on the
dialog is OK, and then click the [Yes].
Click the [NO], then the “LiveViewer” main menu is displayed even though the
network is not established. Click
on the main menu and go back to item 1.5
Selecting the network connection method.
ViewSonic
122
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
If you put a check mark in the box “Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding
Network settings”, the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog
is not displayed again. To display this dialog again, click Option
icon in the
“LiveViewer” main menu and remove the check mark in the box “Not displaying
confirmation dialog for adding Network settings”.
If you want to change the Network
configuration to add, click the [Change]. A
dialog for changing the Network configuration
as shown to the right will be displayed. Enter
IP address and subnet mask , then click the
[OK]. Procedure to connect to the projector
will start.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the
connection to your destination.
If you click the [Cancel], you will return to the
dialog for adding a Network configuration.
If the entered IP address and projector's IP
address are the same, a warning dialog shown
to the right will be displayed.
Click the [OK], and then enter a different IP
address from the projector's one in the dialog
for changing Network configuration.
If the connection is not available with the
entered Network configuration, a warning
dialog shown to the right will be displayed.
Click the [OK] to return to the dialog for
changing the Network configuration, and then
enter appropriate configuration.
NOTE • If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added
on the computer, the added Network configuration will be erased once the
application software is closed.
ViewSonic
123
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
n Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?
The message is appeared when the wireless
adapter you selected is already used for
another network connection.
• To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to item
1.8 Confirming the connection to your
destination.
• Not to connect, click the [No] then the
“LiveViewer” main menu is displayed even
though the network is not established.
Click
on the main menu to go back
to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
ViewSonic
124
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
(3) Configuring manually
After entering the Passcode, you are required to enter the network configuration
manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C.
Wireless LAN
The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable.
1) The setting on the access point. *1
Enter the following information.
SSID : WirelessAccessPoint (example)
Encryption: WEP64bit (example)
Encryption key *2:
(example)
**********
2) The setting on the projector. *3
Enter the following information.
Subnet mask *4: 255.255.255.128
(example)
3) Click the [Connect].
4) The wireless connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
*1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point.
*2 If you use an encryption, you need to set it. Contact the network administrator
to check the encryption key that is set in the projector.
The encryption key is always shown as “
*3 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE.
”.
**********
*4 If you use Subnet mask except Class A/B/C, please set it.
ViewSonic
125
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.5 Selecting the network connection method (continued)
Wired LAN
1) Enter the following information for the
projector.
Subnet mask *1: 255.255.255.128
(example)
2) Click the [Connect].
3) The network connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the
connection to your destination.
*1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A, B or C, this screen appears.
NOTE • If you require the network setting information on the projector, take
the following procedure to find it out.
1) Turn on the projector, and make sure that the projector image is on screen.
2) Press the MENU button on the remote control or the ▲/▼ buttons on the
projector to show the menu on screen.
3) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the “ADVANCED MENU”, and use the
► cursor button to enter the item.
4) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the NETWORK, and use the ► cursor
button to enter the item.
5) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION, and push the ►
cursor button.
6) The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK_INFORMATION-box.
ViewSonic
126
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.6 Manual configuration
There are 3 options for the manual
configuration.
• Profile
• History
• Configure Network Settings Manually
If you select Configure Network Settings
Manually, proceed to item 1.7 Configuring the
network settings manually.
1.6.1 Profile connection
Selecting a profile data connect the network
with the projector.
It is required to store the profile data in
advance.
1) Select the [Profile].
2) Choose a profile data listed in the window.
3) Click the [Connect].
4) The network connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the
connection to your destination.
NOTE • To check the setting in a profile data, follow the process below.
1) Choose a profile data that you want to check.
2) Move the mouse cursor to the profile data, and click the right button on the
mouse to display a pop-up menu.
3) Select the “Property” in the pop-up menu, and click the left button on the
mouse.
4) The setting information of the selected profile data is shown.
• If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection between the
projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied.
If you like to use the Profile connection, set the DHCP off in the projector.
ViewSonic
127
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.6 Manual configuration (continued)
1.6.2 History connection
The “LiveViewer” can memory the network
settings when connecting to the projector as
a history record. After that, selecting a history
record can quickly connect the network with the
projector.
1) Select the [History].
2) Choose a history record listed in the window.
3) Click the [Connect].
4) The network connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
If you want to copy a history record to a profile data, select one of the history
record and click the [Register to profile]. The profile data cannot be erased
automatically.
NOTE • The number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network
adapter. When the 11th data is stored, the oldest record among the 10 will be
overwritten.
• The date & time information in each history record is renewed when the
network is connected by using the history record.
• If the DHCP is set on in the projector, the network connection between the
projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be
varied.
• Even if you use the profile connection, it will be memorized as a history
record.
ViewSonic
128
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually
All setting for the network connection between
the projector and computer is input manually.
Select the [Configure Network Settings
Manually].
The information to be input manually is different, depending on how you want to
connect the projector and computer.
Wireless LAN
The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable.
Wired LAN
If you use the wired LAN, go to Wired LAN.
ViewSonic
129
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)
Wireless LAN
1) The setting on the access point. *1
Enter the following information.
SSID: WirelessAccessPoint (example)
Encryption: WEP64bit (example)
Encryption key *2:
Mode: INFRASTRUCTURE
(example)
**********
2) Click the [Next].
3) Enter the following information that is set in
the projector. *3
IP address : 192.168.1.10 (example)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (example)
4) Click the [Connect].
5) The wireless connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
*1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point.
*2 If you use an encryption, you need to set it. Contact the network administrator
to check the encryption key that is set in the projector.
The encryption key is always shown as “
”.
**********
*3 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE.
ViewSonic
130
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)
Wired LAN
1) Enter the following information for the
projector. *1
IP address : 192.168.1.10 (example)
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 (example)
2) Click the [Connect].
3) The network connection will be established.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination.
*1 To find the network setting on the projector, refer to the NOTE.
[Troubleshooting]
n A network connection could not be established.
Windows prevented network configuration
changes.
You may log in the Windows under User
authority.
Click the [OK], then the “LiveViewer” main
menu is displayed even though the network
is not established. Click
on the main
menu and go back to item 1.5 Selecting the
network connection method.
Consult to the network administrator. Log in the Windows under Administrator
authority. After that, please resume at item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”.
ViewSonic
131
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)
n If you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the
projector.
This dialog will be displayed when you
need to add a Network configuration on
your computer to connect to the projector.
Confirm with your network administrator if
the Network configuration displayed on the
dialog is OK, and then click the [Yes].
Click the [NO], then the “LiveViewer” main menu is displayed even though the
network is not established. Click
on the main menu and go back to item 1.5
Selecting the network connection method.
If you put a check mark in the box “Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding
Network settings”, the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog
is not displayed again. To display this dialog again, click Option
icon in the
“LiveViewer” main menu and remove the check mark in the box “Not displaying
confirmation dialog for adding Network settings”.
If you want to change the Network
configuration to add, click the [Change]. A
dialog for changing the Network configuration
as shown to the right will be displayed. Enter
IP address and subnet mask , then click the
[OK]. Procedure to connect to the projector
will start.
Proceed to item 1.8 Confirming the
connection to your destination.
If you click the [Cancel], you will return to the
dialog for adding a Network configuration.
ViewSonic
132
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.7 Configuring the network settings manually (continued)
If the entered IP address and projector's IP
address are the same, a warning dialog shown
to the right will be displayed.
Click the [OK], and then enter a different IP
address from the projector's one in the dialog
for changing Network configuration.
If the connection is not available with the
entered Network configuration, a warning
dialog shown to the right will be displayed.
Click the [OK] to return to the dialog for
changing the Network configuration, and then
enter appropriate configuration.
NOTE • If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added
on the computer, the added Network configuration will be erased once the
application software is closed.
n Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector?
The message is appeared when the wireless
adapter you selected is already used for
another network connection.
• To connect, click the [Yes]. Proceed to item
1.8 Confirming the connection to your
destination.
• Not to connect, click the [No] then the
“LiveViewer” main menu is displayed even
though the network is not established.
Click
on the main menu to go back
to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
ViewSonic
133
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination
1.8.1 Connection and transmission
When the network connection is established,
the “Connection to Projector successful” screen
is displayed.
Make sure that the right projector that you want
to send your image to is selected, by checking
the projector name and IP address shown in
the screen.
•
To send images to the projector, click the [Yes]. The transmission will be started.
To display the transmitted images, select the LAN port as input source on the
projector.
• Not to send, click the [No], then the “LiveViewer” main menu is displayed
in stand-by mode. (Stand-by mode is the state where there is no image
transmission, although the network connection is established.)
The transmission can be started, if you click
main menu.
or
button on the “LiveViewer”
If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My
Connection, check in the box for the [Register this setting to My Connection].
[Troubleshooting]
n This projector is currently in use (Presenting) by another user.
The projector you want to send your images
to is occupied by another computer in the
Presenter mode.
Click the [OK], then the “LiveViewer” main
menu is displayed in stand-by mode. Retry
to send your images, after the Presenter
mode is off.
ViewSonic
134
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination (continued)
n
A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to.
The projector you want to send your images
to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC-LESS
Presentation.
• Click the [Yes], then the projector will stop
the Slideshow and switch the input source
to the LAN port.
• Click the [No], then the projector is
remained in the Slideshow mode, and the
“LiveViewer” main menu is displayed in
stand-by mode on your computer.
n Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN?
The projector is not set to the LAN as an
input signal.
• Click the [Yes], then the projector is
switched to the LAN.
• Click the [No], then the projector is
remained as it is, and the “LiveViewer”
main menu is displayed in stand-by mode
on your computer.
ViewSonic
135
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.8 Confirming the connection to your destination (continued)
1.8.2 Connection error
When the connection to the projector could not
be established, an error message, “Network
Connection not established”, will come up.
Click the [OK] then the “LiveViewer” main
menu is displayed even though the network
is not established. Click
on the main menu
to go back to item 1.5 Selecting the network
connection method.
NOTE • Check the network setting in the projector, and retry the connection
from item 1.3.2 Starting the “LiveViewer”.
ViewSonic
136
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.9 Profile data
1.9.1 Outline of Profile data
The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a
profile data. Once the data is stored, all you need to do is to select the data to
connect to the network. It is recommended when the same network connection is
often used.
1.9.2 Making Profile data
The profile data is made on the Manual
Configuration screen.
Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each
network adapter.
1) Select the [Profile] and click the [New].
2) The “Create new profile” will come up.
If you have already made 10 profile data, you
cannot make a new one, until you delete a
stored data.
Input all information required for your network
connection.
If you want to clear the information you input,
click the [Clear].
3) Click the [OK], after all information is set.
If you don’t want to store it, click the [Cancel].
4) The new profile data is shown in the profile list, if you click the [OK].
NOTE • When you make a new profile data, it is strongly recommended to
check that the new data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile
connection.
• If you change a network adapter on your computer, make a new profile data
for the adapter.
ViewSonic
137
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.9 Profile data (continued)
1.9.3 Editing Profile data
If necessary, the profile data can be edited on
the Manual Configuration screen.
1) Select the [Profile], and select one of the
data listed in the window.
2) Click the [Edit].
3) The “Edit profile” screen will come up.
4) Edit the information required to be revised.
If you want to clear all information in the
window, click the [Clear].
5) Click the [OK], after the editing is completed.
If you don’t want to store it, click the [Cancel].
6) The edited profile data is stored and shown
in the profile list with the new date created
information, if you click the [OK].
NOTE • When you edit a profile data, it is strongly recommended to check
that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile
connection.
ViewSonic
138
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.9 Profile data (continued)
1.9.4 Registering My Connection
One of the profile data, which is often used, can be registered as the My
Connection profile data. Once the data is registered, all you need to do is to select
the My Connection to connect to the network.
1) Click the [My Connection].
2) The “Add My Connection” screen will come
up.
The currently selected profile data for the My
Connection is shown with a check mark in
the list.
3) Select one of the profile data listed in the
window and put a mark in the check box.
The data selected before is turned unmarked.
4) Click the [OK], then the window is closed.
If you don’t want to select a new one, click
the [Cancel].
NOTE • If you don’t want to use the My Connection, mark no data listed in the
window, and click the [OK].
• In the list, all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is
selected. You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected
network adapter as the My Connection profile data.
ViewSonic
139
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Connection to the network
1.9 Profile data (continued)
Also, you can register a profile data to My
Connection, when the network connection
is established. When it is established, the
“Connection to Projector successful” screen is
displayed.
If you wish to use the current connection
setting for My Connection, check in the box for
the [Register this setting to My Connection].
And then, if it is okay to overwrite the present
data for My Connection, click the [OK].
A new profile data will be created and it is
registered as My Connection profile data.
NOTE • If there are already 10 profile data, the check box cannot be checked.
Please erase one of the existing profile data.
• The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the “LiveViewer”
automatically. The name will be shown at the right side of the check box.
ViewSonic
140
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer”
When you get the connection between your projector and computer, the
“LiveViewer” main menu will be shown on the computer screen.
On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your
images to the projector.
2.1.1 Main menu and Operating buttons
1) Menu Type
There are 2 type of the main menu, Easy type and Advanced type, which can
be switched on screen.
• When the network connection is not established, the Advanced type will be on
screen.
Easy Type
Advanced Type
Status Display
Switch to
Easy type
Switch to Advanced type
Indicator
2) Operating buttons
Starting Capture button
The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed.
The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first.
Stop button
The image transmission is stopped.
NOTE • The images may not be displayed on screen, if the Start/Stop buttons
are clicked repeatedly.
• The primary image is displayed in multi-display environment.
ViewSonic
141
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” (continued)
Hold button
The image on screen is temporally frozen.
The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen.
You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the
projector’s screen.
Display mode button
The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode.
Connect button
The screen to select the connection mode is displayed.
Go to item 1.5.
Option button
The option screen is displayed.
Web control button
Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen
to control the projector and change various settings for the projector.
Information button
The version of the “LiveViewer” is displayed.
, Close button
The network is disconnected and the “LiveViewer” is closed.
Minimize button
The displayed icon changes as shown below depending on the status of the
“LiveViewer”. If the icon is double-clicked, the last type of the main menu will
be shown on screen.
Connected
Disconnected
Not connected
Hold
ViewSonic
142
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” (continued)
2.1.2 Displaying the status
1) Indicator
The indicator shows the following status.
Indicator
Status
Note
The network connection to the projector is
not established yet.
Not connected
The network connection is established, but
the image transmissions on hold.
Hold
The network connection is established and
the images on the computer are being sent
to the projector.
Connected
Disconnected
The network connection to the projector is
disconnected.
2) Status Display in Multi PC mode
The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons.
One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be
shown.
Status
Status icon
No computer is on screen
One computer is on screen.
Two computers are on screen.
Three computers are on screen.
Four computers are on screen.
NOTE • The status display is refreshed in every 3 seconds.
• If the status cannot be acquired, it will not be refreshed.
ViewSonic
143
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” (continued)
2.1.3 Switching the display mode
The “LiveViewer” has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode. The modes can be
switched on the main menu.
1) Click the
button on the main menu.
The buttons below are displayed.
:Status Display
2) Select from to buttons, and click it.
Switching to the Single PC mode : Your image is displayed on full screen.
- Switching to the Multi PC mode : Your image is displayed on a quarter
screen identified in the button.
3) The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above, and the
transmission of your computer image will be started to display your image on
the screen.
4) The icon
on the main menu is replaced by the icon you selected.
NOTE • The image transmission will be stopped, when you click the Single
mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one of the
Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying
your computer images in the Multi PC mode.
• If the Multi PC mode is selected, the projector screen is automatically divided
to 4 zones.
• When the Presenter mode is enabled and the projector is used by a computer
in the Single PC mode, images from other computers cannot be sent to the
projector even if the
(Full screen) button is pressed.
• When a quarter-screen occupied by another computer is selected, image
transmission from that computer will be put on hold and the image of the
currently specified computer will be displayed.
The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the
PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu. The last setting made will take
effect regardless of the setting method.
ViewSonic
144
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” (continued)
2.1.4 Option menu
Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen.
“Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings”
This setting allows you to choose to display or not the confirmation dialog
for adding a Network configuration when you connect your computer to the
projector. It is turned off by default.
Optimize Performance
The “LiveViewer” captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the
JPEG data to the projector. The “LiveViewer” has two options that have
different compression rate of JPEG data.
Transmission speed
Speed takes priority over Image quality.
It makes JPEG compression rate higher.
The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the
transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse.
Image quality
Image quality takes priority over Speed.
It makes JPEG compression rate lower.
The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the
transferred data is larger, but the image quality is better.
ViewSonic
145
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.1 Using the “LiveViewer” (continued)
Presenter Mode
In the Single PC mode, the projector can be occupied by one computer
and can block an access from any other computer, if the Presenter mode is
selected in the “LiveViewer”.
While making your presentation, you don’t need to worry that the image on
screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer.
If you want to turn it on, put a check mark in the check box.
NOTE • If the Multi PC mode is selected, the setting for the Presenter mode is
invalid.
• When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode, the Presenter
mode setting of the computer is valid.
• The Presenter Mode is set valid in factory default setting.
• In addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter
Mode is turned on, you can cancel this function by using the projector's OSD
menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in
the NETWORK menu.
Display User Name
A “User Name” that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric
characters.
The user name can be displayed on the projector screen, so you can find out
whose image is currently on the screen.
(Refer to NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide)
If the check box is not marked, the information is not sent to the projector.
ViewSonic
146
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.2 Starting the Network Presentation
This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project
computer images transmitted through a network.
The “LiveViewer” allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by
connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables.
This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations
and conduct conferences.
To start the Network Presentation, select the LAN port as the input source on the
projector and click the Starting Capture button on the “LiveViewer”.
2.2.1 Display mode
Two display modes, Single PC mode and Multi PC mode, are available for the
Network Presentation.
1) Single PC mode
The projector displays images sent by one computer.
ViewSonic
147
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Network Presentation
2.2 Starting the Network Presentation (continued)
2) Multi PC mode
The projector screen is divided to 4 zones. The projector displays images in
one zone sent by a computer, so that the projector can display images sent by
up to 4 computers at the same time.
2.2.2 Presenter mode
In the Single PC mode, the projector can be occupied by one computer and can
block an access from any other computer, if the Presenter mode is selected in the
“LiveViewer”.
While making your presentation, you don’t need to worry that the image on screen
is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer.
The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the “LiveViewer” main
menu.
2.2.3 Display User Name
A “User Name” can be input in the “LiveViewer”, which is displayed on screen
by operating the menu on the projector. So, it can be found out whose image is
currently displayed on screen.
ViewSonic
148
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3. Web Control
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a
computer that is connected to the same network.
NOTE • Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is required.
• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable
JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed.
ViewSonic
149
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.1 Logon
To use the Web Control function, you need to logon with your user name and
password.
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Display the logon window as shown on the right.
There are two options to display this window.
Using the “LiveViewer”
Connect your computer and the projector
via Network using the “LiveViewer”.
Then click the Web Control button
on
the “LiveViewer” main menu to start the
Web browser software.
Using Web browser software
Make sure that your computer and the
projector is connected via network, and
then start Web browser.
Enter the projector's IP address into URL
input box of the Web browser as the example below, and then press the
Enter key or
button.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web
browser and press the Enter key or click
button.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
NOTE • The language used on the Web Control screen is the same as that
of the OSD on the projector. If you want to change it, you need to change the
OSD language on the projector. (SCREEN menu in the Operating Guide)
ViewSonic
150
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.1 Logon (Continued)
Below are the factory default settings for user name and password.
User name
Password
Administrator
<blank>
If you logon successfully, the screen below will be displayed.
Main menu
3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu.
ViewSonic
151
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.2 Network Information
Displays the projector’s current network configuration settings.
Item
Projector Name
DHCP
Description
Displays the projector name settings.
Displays the DHCP configuration settings.
Displays the current IP address.
Displays the subnet mask.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS Server Address
MAC Address
Displays the default gateway.
Displays the DNS server address.
Displays the ethernet MAC address.
ViewSonic
152
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.3 Network Settings
Displays and configures network settings.
Item
Description
Configures network settings.
IP Configuration
DHCP ON
Enables DHCP.
Disables DHCP.
DHCP OFF
IP Address
Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Configures the name of the projector.
The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols
can be used. !"#$%&'*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space.
Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default.
Projector Name
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.
The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.
sysLocation (SNMP)
sysContact (SNMP)
Configures the contact information to be referred to when
using SNMP.
The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.
DNS Server Address
AMX D.D.
Configures the DNS server address.
Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector
from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network. For the
(AMX Device Discovery) details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site.
URL: http://www.amx.com
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection.
When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can
restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
ViewSonic
153
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.4 Port Settings
Displays and configures communication port settings.
Item
Description
Network Control Port1
(Port:23)
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
Network Control Port2
(Port:9715)
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
PJLink TM Port
(Port:4352)
Configures the PJLink TM port (Port:4352).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 4352.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
My Image Port
(Port:9716)
Configures the My Image Port (Port:9716).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
Messenger Port
(Port:9719)
Configures the Messenger Port (Port:9719).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9719.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
ViewSonic
154
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.4 Port Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
SNMP Port
Port open
Configures the SNMP port.
Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Trap address
Download MIB file
Downloads a MIB file from the projector.
Configures the Bridge port number.
Network Bridge Port
Input the port number.
Except for 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352
between 1024 and 65535 can be set up. It is set to 9717 as
the default setting.
Port Number
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.
ViewSonic
155
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.5 Mail Settings
Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.
Item
Description
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Configure the conditions for sending e-mail under the Alert
Settings.
Send Mail
Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
SMTP Server Address
Configures the sender e-mail address.
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Sender E-mail address
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You
can also specify the [TO] or [CC] for each address. The
length of the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Recipient E-mail address
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the
[Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the
[Send Test Mail].
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
ViewSonic
156
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.6 Alert Settings
Displays and configures failure & alert settings.
Item
Description
Cover Error
Fan Error
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
The cooling fan is not operating.
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior
portion has become heated.
Lamp Error
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become
heated.
Temp Error
Air Flow Error
Cold Error
The internal temperature is rising.
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become
overcooled.
Filter Error
Other Error
Filter time over.
Other error.
If displaying this error, please contact your dealer.
Schedule Execution
Error
Schedule Execution error.
Lamp Time Alarm
Filter Time Alarm
Lamp time over Alarm Time setting.
Filter time over Alarm Time setting.
Transition Detector
Alarm
Transition Detector Alarm. (SECURITY menu in the
Operating Guide)
When the projector is supplied with the power, it works as
below.
•
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL:the projector's
power status changes from “OFF” to “Standby state”.
If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING:the projector's power
Cold Start
•
status changes from “Standby state” to “ON (lamp is turned on)”.
(SETUP menu in the Operating Guide)
Authentication Failure
The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community.
Refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed explanation
of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error.
ViewSonic
157
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.6 Alert Settings (Continued)
The Alert Items are shown below.
Item
Description
Configures the time to alert.
(Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.)
Alarm Time
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts.
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Mail Text
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters, but if you are using some of special characters
below the length may be shorter.
Special characters " ' : & , % \ and space
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER
MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines
the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen. An
e-mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is
set. No notification e-mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN
OFF. (OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder)
of the lamp timer. When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured
through the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.
• Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder)
of the filter time. When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured
in the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.
ViewSonic
158
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.7 Schedule Settings
Displays and configures schedule settings.
Item
Description
Configures the daily schedule.
Configures the Sunday schedule.
Daily
Sunday
Monday
Configures the Monday schedule.
Configures the Tuesday schedule.
Configures the Wednesday schedule.
Configures the Thursday schedule.
Configures the Friday schedule.
Configures the Saturday schedule.
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Specific date No.1
Specific date No.2
Specific date No.3
Specific date No.4
Specific date No.5
Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.
ViewSonic
159
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.7 Schedule Settings (Continued)
The schedule settings are shown below.
Item
Description
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable the schedule.
Configures the month and date.
This item appears only when Specific date (No. 1-5) is
selected.
Date (Month/Day)
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list. To add additional
functions and events, set the following items.
Item
Description
Time
Configures the time to execute commands.
Command
[Parameter]
Configures the commands to be executed.
Power
Configures the parameters for power control.
Input Source
Configures the parameters for input switching.
My Image
Messenger
Slideshow
Configures the parameters for My Image data display.
Configures the parameters for Messenger data display.
Configures the Start/Stop parameters for the Slideshow.
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the schedule list.
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the schedule list.
Click the [Reset] button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings
from the schedule list.
ViewSonic
160
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.7 Schedule Settings (Continued)
NOTE
• After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the
projector before configuring the schedules. Strong shock may make the date
and time settings get out of tune.
• Events “My Image” and “Messenger” will not be executed appropriately but
result in “schedule execution error” status in case lamp does not light or/and
display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution
time.
• Events “Input Source” and “My Image” will not be executed if security feature
is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature.
• Certain error state in the projector (such as temperature error, lamp error) will
prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions/events.
• If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for
display exists at the scheduled event time, a schedule execution error occurs
against the scheduled Slideshow event.
• When you start the Slideshow, input source will be automatically switched to
the USB TYPE A port.
• Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be
displayed for the scheduled Slideshow.
• Please refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case scheduled
functions/events are not executed appropriately as you've set.
ViewSonic
161
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.8 Date/Time Settings
Displays and configures the date and time settings.
Item
Current Date
Description
Configures the current date in year/month/day format.
Current Time
Configures the current time in hour:minute:second format.
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and
set the following items.
Daylight Savings Time
Start
Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
hour
Time
Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).
minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).
Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.
Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).
End
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
hour
Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).
Time
minute Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).
ViewSonic
162
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.8 Date/Time Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Configures the time difference. Set the same time difference
as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT
manager.
Time difference
SNTP
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain
SNTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up
to 255 characters.
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server (hour:minute).
Cycle
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and
override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
ViewSonic
163
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.9 Security Settings
Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.
Item
User Account
Description
Configures the user name and password.
Configures the user name.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
User name
Password
Configures the password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter Password
Network Control
Reenter the above password for verification.
Configures the Authentication password for the command
control.
Authentication
Password
Configures the Authentication password. The length of the
text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Reenter the above password for verification.
SNMP
Configures the community name if SNMP is used.
Configures the community name. The length of the text can
be up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Community name
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.
ViewSonic
164
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the Projector Control menu.
Select an item with the mouse.
Most of the items have a submenu. Refer to the
table below for details.
NOTE • The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user
changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking
the [Refresh] button.
Controls the projector.
Item
Description
MAIN
POWER
Turns the power on/off.
Selects the input source.
INPUT SOURCE
PICTURE MODE
BLANK ON/OFF
MUTE
Selects the picture mode setting.
Turns Blank on/off.
Turns Mute on/off.
FREEZE
Turns Freeze on/off.
Controls the magnify setting.
In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even
though it does not reach to maximum setting value.
MAGNIFY
MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position.
MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position.
TEMPLATE
Turns template on/off.
Selects MY IMAGE data.
Deletes MY IMAGE data.
MY IMAGE
MY IMAGE DELETE
ViewSonic
165
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
PICTURE
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
GAMMA
Adjusts the brightness setting.
Adjusts the contrast setting.
Selects the gamma setting.
Selects the color temperature setting.
Adjusts the color setting.
COLOR TEMP
COLOR
TINT
Adjusts the tint setting.
SHARPNESS
ACTIVE IRIS
MYMEMORY SAVE
Adjusts the sharpness setting.
Selects the active iris setting.
Saves the MyMemory data.
MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data.
IMAGE
ASPECT
Selects the aspect setting.
Adjusts the over scan setting.
Adjusts the vertical position.
Adjusts the horizontal position.
Adjusts the horizontal phase.
Adjusts the horizontal size.
OVER SCAN
V POSITION
H POSITION
H PHASE
H SIZE
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic adjustment.
INPUT
PROGRESSIVE
VIDEO NR
COLOR SPACE
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO FORMAT
C-VIDEO FORMAT
HDMI FORMAT
HDMI RANGE
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
Selects the progressive setting.
Selects the video noise reduction setting.
Selects the color space.
Selects the COMPONENT port setting.
Selects the s-video format setting.
Selects the video format setting.
Selects the HDMITM format setting.
Selects the HDMITM range setting.
Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type.
Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type.
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN1
FRAME LOCK -
COMPUTER IN2
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN1 function on/off.
Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN2 function on/off.
FRAME LOCK - HDMI Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI function on/off.
ViewSonic
166
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
SETUP
Description
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting.
KEYSTONE V
KEYSTONE H
Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting.
Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting.
Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the
corners and sides.
PERFECT FIT
AUTO ECO MODE
ECO MODE
Turns on/off the automatic eco mode function.
Selects the eco mode.
MIRROR
Selects the mirror status.
STANDBY MODE
Selects the standby mode.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input
port is selected.
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT - LAN
MONITOR OUT - USB Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input
TYPE A port is selected.
MONITOR OUT - USB Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input
TYPE B
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
HDMI
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
COMPONENT
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input
port is selected.
MONITOR OUT -
S-VIDEO
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S-VIDEO input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
VIDEO
Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is
selected.
MONITOR OUT -
STANDBY
Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode.
ViewSonic
167
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
AUDIO
VOLUME
SPEAKER
Adjusts the volume setting.
Turns the built-in speaker on/off.
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN1
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN2
AUDIO SOURCE -
LAN
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1 input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2 input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - LAN input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
USB TYPE A
AUDIO SOURCE -
USB TYPE B
AUDIO SOURCE -
HDMI
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - HDMI input port.
AUDIO SOURCE -
COMPONENT
AUDIO SOURCE -
S-VIDEO
AUDIO SOURCE -
VIDEO
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPONENT input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - S-VIDEO input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - VIDEO input port.
Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode.
AUDIO SOURCE -
STANDBY
HDMI AUDIO
MIC LEVEL
Selects the HDMITM audio setting.
Selects the microphone level.
MIC VOLUME
Adjusts the microphone volume setting.
SCREEN
LANGUAGE
Selects the language for the OSD.
Adjusts the vertical Menu position.
Adjusts the horizontal Menu position.
Selects the Blank mode.
MENU POSITION V
MENU POSITION H
BLANK
START UP
Selects the start up screen mode.
Turns MyScreen lock function on/off.
Turns the message function on/off.
Selects the template setting.
MyScreen Lock
MESSAGE
TEMPLATE
C.C. - DISPLAY
C.C. - MODE
C.C. - CHANNEL
Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting.
Selects Closed Caption MODE setting.
Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting.
ViewSonic
168
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
OPTION
AUTO SEARCH
Turns the automatic signal search function on/off.
Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function
on/off.
AUTO KEYSTONE
DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on/off.
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal
is detected.
AUTO POWER OFF
USB TYPE B
Selects the USB TYPE B setting.
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-1 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-1
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-2 button on the
included remote control.
MY BUTTON-2
MY SOURCE
Selects the My Source setting.
REMOTE FREQ. -
NORMAL
Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function
on/off.
REMOTE FREQ. -
HIGH
Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on/
off.
ViewSonic
169
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.10 Projector Control (Continued)
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the Projector Control menu.
Click the [Quit Presenter Mode].
Item
Description
SERVICE
Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode.
ViewSonic
170
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.11 Remote Control
You can use your Web browser to control the
projector.
• Do not attempt to control the projector with
the projector’s remote control and via your Web
browser at the same time. It may cause some
operational errors in the projector.
The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote
Control screen.
Item
Description
POWER
Assigned the same operation as STANDBY/ON button.
Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button.
Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button.
Assigned the same operation as BLANK button.
Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button.
Assigned the same operation as MUTE button.
Assigned the same operation as MENU button.
Assigned the same operation as ▲ button.
Assigned the same operation as ▼ button.
Assigned the same operation as ◄ button.
Assigned the same operation as ► button.
Assigned the same operation as ENTER button.
Assigned the same operation as RESET button.
Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button.
Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button.
Starts the Slideshow.
COMPUTER
VIDEO
BLANK
FREEZE
MUTE
MENU
▲
▼
◄
►
ENTER
RESET
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
SLIDESHOW
NOTE • The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that
performs an action while holding a button clicked down.
• Since the repeat function is not available, click the button repeatedly as many
times as you require.
•
Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while, the Web Remote Control
sends your request command one time only. Release the button, then click it again.
When the [POWER] button is pushed, a message window comes up to confirm
•
the operation. To control the power, push [OK], otherwise push [Cancel].
• The [PAGE DOWN] and [PAGE UP] buttons on the Web Remote Control
cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector.
ViewSonic
171
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.12 Projector Status
Displays and configures the current projector status.
Item
Error Status
Description
Displays the current error status
Lamp Time
Filter Time
Power Status
Input Status
Blank On/Off
Mute
Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Displays the usage time for the current filter.
Displays the current power status.
Displays the current input signal source.
Displays the current Blank on/off status.
Displays the current Mute on/off status.
Displays the current Freeze status.
Freeze
ViewSonic
172
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Web Control
3.13 Network Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection.
Item
Description
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to
activate new configuration settings.
Restart
NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or
configure the projector via a web browser. Wait 30 seconds or more after
clicking the [Restart] button to log on again.
ViewSonic
173
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. My Image Function
4. My Image Function
The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.
Transfer image data
1
4
Display image data (
-
)
MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer.
Use the application to transfer the image data.
It can be downloaded from the ViewSonic web site (http://www.viewsonic.com/
products/pro9500.htm).
Refer to the manual for the application for instructions.
To display the transferred image, select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK
menu. For more information, please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of
the NETWORK menu. (NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide)
NOTE • It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image.
(OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling in detail.
• If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display
function, the application for the USB Display will be closed. To restart the
application, exit the MY IMAGE function, and then the software in the projector,
LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe, will run again. (USB Display in the Operating Guide)
ViewSonic
174
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. My Image Function
4. My Image Function (Continued)
Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is
used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then
click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the My
Image Port (Port: 9716). Click the [Enable]
check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear
the check box.
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Select the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port:
4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the
network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the
[Network Restart] on the main menu.
ViewSonic
175
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Messenger Function
5. Messenger Function
The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen.
The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text
transferred from the computer on real time, and the other chooses and displays
the text data from the ones once stored in the projector.
Transfer text data
1
2
3
4
4
Display text data (ex.
)
Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer. To
edit, transfer and display the text data, use the application. You can download it
from the ViewSonic web site (http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm).
Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function and
instructions of the application.
NOTE • It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum.
• Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying
messenger text on/off. (OPTION menu in the Operating Guide)
• The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web
browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling for the detail.
ViewSonic
176
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Messenger Function
5. Messenger Function (Continued)
Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger function is
used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then
click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the
Messenger Port (Port: 9719). Click the
[Enable] check box for the [Authentication]
setting when authentication is required,
otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Select the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port:
4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the
network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the
[Network Restart] on the main menu.
ViewSonic
177
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Network Bridge Function
6. Network Bridge Function
This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform
mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface.
Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function, a computer that is connected with
this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is
connected with this projector by RS-232C communication as a network terminal.
Protocol change
TCP/IP data
Serial data
RS-232C
RS-232C cable
Ethernet
LAN cable
External device
Computer
LAN port
CONTROL port
6.1 Connecting devices
1) Connect the projector’s LAN port and the computer’s LAN port with a LAN
cable, for Ethernet communication.
2) Connect the projector’s CONTROL port and the device’s RS-232C port with
an RS-232C cable, for RS-232C communication.
NOTE • Before connecting the devices, read the manuals for the devices to
ensure the connection.
For RS-232C connection, check the specifications of each port and use the
suitable cable.
ViewSonic
178
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Network Bridge Function
6.2 Communication setup
To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the
projector, use items in the COMMUNICATION menu. Open the menu of the
projector and select the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. (OPTION
menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
1) Using the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, select the NETWORK BRIDGE
for the CONTROL port.
2) Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu, select the proper baud rate and parity
for the CONTROL port, according to the specification of the RS-232C port of
the connected device.
Item
Condition
BAUD RATE 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps/38400bps
PARITY
Data length
Start bit
NONE/ODD/EVEN
8 bit (fixed)
1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit
1 bit (fixed)
3) Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu, set up the proper method for the
CONTROL port according to your use.
NOTE • The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default
setting.
• Using the COMMUNICATION menu, set up the communication. Remember
that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication.
• When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE, the CONTROL
port doesn't accept RS-232C commands.
6.3 Communication port
For the NETWORK BRIDGE function, send the data from the computer to the
projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the “Port
Settings” of web browser.
NOTE • Except for 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352 between 1024
and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number. It is set to 9717
as the default setting.
ViewSonic
179
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Network Bridge Function
6.4 Transmission method
The transmission method can be selected from the menus, only when the
NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE.
(OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
HALF-DUPLEX FULL-DUPLEX
6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one
direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time.
The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer
while waiting for response data from an external device. After the projector
receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is
past, the projector can receive the data from the computer.
That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to
synchronize the communication.
To use the HALF-DUPLEX method, set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following
the instructions below.
TCP/IP data
Ethernet
Protocol change
Serial data
RS-232C
LAN cable
RS-232C cable
External device
Computer
Transmitting data
Transmitting data
Response limit
time
Discarding data
Response data
Response data
Transmitting data
Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu, set the waiting time for response data
from an external device. (OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in
the Operating Guide)
OFF 1s 2s 3s ( OFF)
ViewSonic
180
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Network Bridge Function
6.4 Transmission method (Continued)
NOTE • With using the HALF-DUPLEX method, the projector can send out
254 byte data as maximum at once.
• If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and
the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF, the projector can receive the data
from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously.
The OFF is selected as the default setting.
6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX
This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and
receiving data at the same time, without monitoring response data from an
external device.
With using this method, the computer and an external device will send the data
out of synchronization. If it is required to synchronize them, set the computer to
make the synchronization.
NOTE • In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting
and receiving the data, it may not be able to control an external device well
depending on the processing status of the projector.
ViewSonic
181
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7. Other Functions
7.1 E-mail Alerts
The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e-mail
addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring
maintenance or detected an error.
NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses
power.
Mail Settings
To use the projector’s e-mail alert function, please configure the following items
through a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to item 3.5 Mail
Settings for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in the [Mail Settings] to confirm
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the
specified addresses.
Subject line :Test Mail
<Projector name>
Text
:Send Test Mail
Date
<Testing date>
Time
<Testing time>
IP Address
<Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
ViewSonic
182
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.1 E-mail Alerts (Continued)
5) Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu to configure the E-mail Alerts
settings.
6) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to item 3.6 Alert Setting for further
information.
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:
Subject line : <Mail title>
<Projector name>
Text
: <Mail text>
Date
<Failure/Warning date>
<Failure/Warning time>
<Projector IP address>
Time
IP Address
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
ViewSonic
183
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.2 Projector Management using SNMP
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the
projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on
the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer
to use this function.
NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network
administrator.
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor
the projector via SNMP.
SNMP Settings
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Download MIB file] to download a MIB file.
NOTE • To use the downloaded MIB file, specify the file by your SNMP
manager.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port. Set the IP address to
send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration
settings have been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the
following items.
6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
7) Click the [SNMP] and set the community name on the screen that is displayed.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been
changed. Click the [Network Restart] and configure the following items.
8) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click the
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be
configured.
9) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ViewSonic
184
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.3 Event Scheduling
The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on /
power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector.
NOTE • You can schedule the following control events: Power, Input Source,
My Image, Messenger, Slideshow.
• The power on / off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are
defined at the same time.
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) weekly 3) specific date.
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) weekly 3)
daily.
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific date No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific
date No. 2’ and so on.
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events.
ViewSonic
185
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.3 Event Scheduling(Continued)
Schedule Settings
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required
schedule item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday,
please select the [Sunday].
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the date (month/day) for specific date scheduling.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
7) After configure the time, command and parameters, click the [Register] to add
the new event.
8) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.
There are three types of scheduling.
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a
specified day of the week.
3) Specific date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.
NOTE • In standby mode, the POWER indicator will flash green for approx. 3
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to the
projector and the outlet. The schedule function does not work when the breaker
in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green when the
projector is receiving AC power.
ViewSonic
186
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.3 Event Scheduling(Continued)
Date/Time Settings
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.
Refer to item 3.8 Date/Time Settings for further information.
4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time
even when the date and time have been set correctly. Replace the battery by
following the instructions on replacing the battery.
(Replacing the internal clock battery in the Quick Start Guide)
• The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
ViewSonic
187
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C
commands.
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23 (Network Control Port1 (Port: 23))
TCP #9715 (Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715))
NOTE • Command control is available only via the specified port above.
Command Control Settings
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK].
3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ViewSonic
188
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
7) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu.
8) Click the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.
* See NOTE.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE
• The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port:
4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719).
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart the
network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the
[Network Restart] on the main menu.
ViewSonic
189
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)
Command Format
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.
● TCP #23
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data
format is the same as the RS-232C commands.
However, the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication
failure when authentication is enabled.
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>
Reply
Error code
0x04 0x00
0x1F
● TCP #9715
Send Data format
The following formatting is added to the header (0 x 02), Data length (0 x 0D),
Checksum (1 byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.
Connection
Header
Data length
RS-232Ccommand
Check Sum
ID
0x02
0x0D
13 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Header
Data length
→ 0x02, Fixed
→ RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)
RS-232C command → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF
(13 bytes)
Check Sum
→ This is the value to make zero on the addition of the
lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum.
→ Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached
to the reply data)
Connection ID
ViewSonic
190
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)
Reply Data format
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.
<ACK reply>
Connection
Reply
ID
0x06
1 byte
<NAK reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x15
1 byte
<Error reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x1C
Error code
2 bytes
1 byte
<Data reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x1D
Data
2 bytes
1 byte
<Projector busy reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
Status code
0x1F
2 bytes
1 byte
<Authentication error reply>
Authentication
Error code
Connection
ID
Reply
0x1F
0x04 0x00
1 byte
ViewSonic
191
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Other Functions
7.4 Command Control via the Network (Continued)
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication
Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to “password” and the
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.
1) Connect the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the Authentication Password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands
and send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the
authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
ViewSonic
192
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
Reference
Problem
Likely Cause
Things to Check
Page
Number
18, 100
in the
Operating
Guide
The projector is not turned
on.
Is the projector’s lamp on?
No image
19, 20
in the
Operating
Guide
The projector’s input source Is the projector switched to
isn’t switched to LAN.
LAN?
Check the network
configurations of the
computer and projector. If
you change the projector’s
settings, turn off the
The computer and/or
projector’s network settings
projector’s AC power and
–
The projector
are not configured correctly. then turn it on again. If you
simply put the projector in
that you want
to connect to is
nowhere to be
found on the
list of available
projectors
STANDBY power mode and
then turn it on again, the new
settings might not take effect.
Refer to the manual for the
firewall software and take
Firewall software other than one of the following actions:
Windows® Firewall is installed - Exclude the “LiveViewer”
–
–
–
in your computer.
from blocking item list
- Disable the firewall while
using the “LiveViewer”
The computer and/or
Check the network
configurations of the
projector's network settings
are not configured correctly. computer and projector.
Use network utilities that may
Can't
communicate
come with your computer
An access point is used, and
or wireless LAN card to
your computer is connected
establish wireless network
to the access point via
connection. For detail,
wireless LAN.
refer to the manual of the
computer or the card.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
193
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting (Continued)
Reference
Page
Problem
Likely Cause
Things to Check
Number
The projector isn’t capable
of relaying dynamic images
such as PowerPoint®
Switching the priority to
‘Transmission Speed’ under
the options menu may help
to improve speed.
41
41
The projected
image is rather
slow compared
to that of the
computer
animation at full speed.
Switching the priority to
‘Transmission Speed’ under
the options menu may help
to improve speed.
The compression rate being
used for transferring the
images is too low.
In some combinations of
If there is a video
computer's video card and
acceleration level adjustment
function in your application,
please try to adjust it. Refer
your application manual in
detail.
Can't display
the movies
correctly.
application software, there is
a possibility that true image -
especially movies played by media
player - cannot be transferred to
the projector with the “LiveViewer”.
–
Network connection
between the
computer and
projector is
disconnected
when computer
display resolution
is changed
Please re-connect using
“Connect button” after
changing computer display
resolution, or change display
resolution before connecting
with the “LiveViewer”.
The computer-Projector
network connection might be
disconnected when computer
display resolution is changed
while displaying picture.
37
during Network
Presentation.
Try setting the priority to 'Image
Quality' in the “LiveViewer”
Option menu. You may
Images
The compression rate being
contain lots of used for transferring the
41
–
interference.
images is too high.
experience a drop in speed.
Neither transparency
nor translucency
effects (Glass)
The “LiveViewer” does not
support these features of
Windows Vista® Aero®.
Using the “LiveViewer” with
Windows® Aero® mode.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
194
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting (Continued)
Reference
Problem
Others
Likely Cause
Things to Check
Page
Number
- Information from
the projector
to computer is
not correct or
completed
Communication between the
projector and computer is not
working well.
70
Try “RESTART” in SERVICE
menu under the NETWORK
menu.
in the
Operating
Guide
- The projector does NETWORK Functions of the
not respond
- Image on screen
is frozen.
projector is not working well.
ViewSonic
195
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication
Appendix
RS-232C Communication
When the projector connects to the computer by RS-232C communication, the
projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table.
Connection
1. Turn off the projector and the computer.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the computer's RS-232C port
with a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the specification
shown in figure
2.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector
on.
3.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF. (OPTION menu - SERVICE -
COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
4.
RS-232C
CONTROL
RS-232C Cable
(cross)
CONTROL port
of the projector
RS-232C port
of the computer
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
6
7
8
9
CD (1)
RD(2)
TD (3)
(1)
(2) RD
(3) TD
－
DTR (4)
(4)
－
GND (5)
DSR (6)
RTS (7)
DTS (8)
RI (9)
(5) GND
(6)
(7) RTS
(8) CTS
－
(9)
－
ViewSonic
196
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Communicaion settings
1. Protocol
19200bps,8N1
("h" shows hexadecimal)
2. Command format
7
8
9
10 11 12
Data
Byte Number
Command
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Header
Data
Packet
Header
code
CRC
flag
Setting
code
Action
Type
size
Action
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
<SET>Change setting to
desired value [(cL)(cH)]
by [(eL)(eH)].
(aL) (aH) 01h 00h (bL) (bH) (cL) (cH)
(aL) (aH) 02h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
(aL) (aH) 04h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<GET>Read projector
internal setup value [(bL)
(bH)] .
<INCREMENT>
Increment setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
BEh EFh
03h
06h 00h
<DECREMENT>
Decrement setup value
[(bL)(bH)] by 1.
(aL) (aH) 05h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
(aL) (aH) 06h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h
<EXECUTE> Run a
command [(bL)(bH)].
[Header code] [Packet] [Data size]
Set [BEh, EFh, 03h, 06h, 00h] to byte number 0 4.
~
[CRC flag]
For byte number 5, 6, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command
table
.
[Action]
Set functional code to byte number 7, 8.
<SET> = [01h, 00h], <GET> = [02h, 00h], <INCREMENT> = [04h, 00h]
<DECREMENT> = [05h, 00h], <EXECUTE> = [06h, 00h]
Refer to the Communication command table.
[Type] [Setting code]
For byte number
table
9
～
12, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command
.
ViewSonic
197
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
("h" shows hexadecimal)
3. Response code / Error code
(1) ACK reply : 06h
When the projector receives the Set, Increment, Decrement or Execute
command correctly, the projector changes the setting data for the specified
item by [Type], and it returns the code.
(2) NAK reply : 15h
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the projector
returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h
When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons,
the projector returns the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and the setting status of the projector.
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh
When the projector receives the GET command correctly, the projector returns
the responce code and 2 bytes of data.
For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
NOTE •
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
• Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined
command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other
code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and
when the lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the
•
projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is
shorter than indicated by the data length code, the projector returns the error
code to the computer.
ViewSonic
198
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network
Command Control via the Network
When the projector connects network, the projector can be controlled with RS-
232C commands from the computer with web browser.
For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network
command table
.
Connection
1. Turn off the projector and the computer.
Connect the projector's LAN port and the computer's LAN port with a LAN
cable. Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure (Use CAT-5
or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used )
2.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
3.
LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater)
LAN
LAN
ViewSonic
199
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
Communicaion Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23
TCP #9715
Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used.
Port Settings
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port1 (Port: 23)] to use TCP #23.
Port open
Default setting is “Enable”.
Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Authentication
Default setting is “Disable”.
Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network
Control Port2 (Port: 9715)] to use TCP
#9715.
Port open
Default setting is “Enable”.
Network Control
Port2 (Port: 9715)
Click the [Enable] check box for the
[Authentication] setting when authentication
is required.
Authentication
Default setting is “Enable”.
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
Security Settings
Authentication
Password
Enter the desired authentication password.
This setting will be the same for [Network
Control Port1 (Port: 23)] and [Network
Control Port2 (Port: 9715)].
Network Control
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Default setting is blank.
ViewSonic
200
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
Command control settings
[TCP #23]
1. Command format
Same as RS-232C communication, refer to RS-232C Communicaton command format.
2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal)
Four of the response / error code used for TCP#23 are the same as RS-232C
Communication (1)~(4). One authentication error reply (5) is added.
(1) ACK reply : 06h
Refer to RS-232C communication.
(2) NAK reply : 15h
Refer to RS-232C communication.
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h
Refer to RS-232C communication.
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh
Refer to RS-232C communication.
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h
When authentication error occurred, the projector returns the error code.
[TCP #9715]
1. Command format
The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of
TCP#9715 are used.
Header
0×02
Data length
0×0D
RS-232C command
13 bytes
Check sum
1 byte
Connection ID
1 byte
[Header]
02, Fixed
[Data Length]
RS-232C commands byte length (0×0D, Fixed)
[RS-232C commands]
Refer to RS-232C Communication command format.
[Check Sum]
This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header
to the checksum.
[Connection ID]
Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data).
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an
undefined command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any
other code.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
ViewSonic
201
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Control via the Network (continued)
("h" shows hexadecimal)
2. Response code / Error code
The connection ID is attached for the TCP#23's response / error codes are
used. The connection ID is same as the sending command format.
(1) ACK reply : 06h + ××h
(××h : connection ID)
(2) NAK reply : 15h + ××h
(3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h + ××h
(4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh + ××h
(5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h + ××h
(6) Projector busy reply: 1Fh + ××××h + ××h
When the projector is too busy to receives the command, the projector returns
the error code.
In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again.
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm. When the projector is
using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind
this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with
the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send.
Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.
1) Select the projector.
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and
send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands,
the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.
ViewSonic
202
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Bridge Communication
Network Bridge Communication
This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function.
When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton, an external
device that is connected with this projector by RS-232C communication can be
controlled from the computer as a network terminal.
For details, see the 6. Network Bridge unction in the Network Guide.
Connection
Connect the computer's LAN port and the projector's LAN port with a LAN
cable.
1.
Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the RS-232C port of the
2.
devices that you want to control with a RS-232C cable.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector
on.
3.
Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE. (OPTION menu -
SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
4.
LAN
LAN
CONTROL
RS-232C
ViewSonic
203
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Bridge Communication
Communication settings
For communication setting, use the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION
menu. (OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide)
Item
BAUD RATE
Data length
PARITY
Condition
4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps
8 bit (fixed)
NONE/ODD/EVEN
Start bit
1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit
1 bit (fixed)
Transmission method
HALF-DUPLEX/FULL-DUPLEX
For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the
NOTE •
manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables.
Turn off (the power of ) both the projector and other devices and unplug ,
•
beore connecting them.
For details of Transmission method, refer to 6.4 Transmission method in
•
the Network Guide.
ViewSonic
204
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
RS-232C Communication / Network command table
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Turn off
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
2A D3
BA D2
19 D3
01 00
01 00
02 00
00 60
00 60
00 60
00 00
01 00
00 00
Set
Turn on
Get
Power
[Example return]
00 00
[Off]
01 00
[On]
06 00
02 00
[Cool down]
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
FE D2
3E D0
0E D2
01 00
01 00
01 00
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
20 60
00 00
04 00
03 00
05 00
02 00
01 00
06 00
0B 00
0C 00
00 00
00 00
06 00
06 00
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
06 00 AE D1 01 00
Set
06 00
06 00
06 00
9E D3
6E D3
5E D1
01 00
01 00
01 00
Input Source
USB TYPE A
LAN
06 00 CE D5 01 00
06 00 FE D7 01 00
06 00 CD D2 02 00
USB TYPE B
Get
06 00
D9 D8
02 00
[Example return]
00 00
[Normal]
04 00
01 00
[Cover error]
05 00
02 00
[Fan error]
07 00
03 00
[Lamp error]
Get
Error Status
08 00
[Temp error] [Air flow error] [Cold error]
[Filter error]
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
7C D2
1A D2
02 00
04 00
07 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
04 00
20 00
21 00
22 00
30 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
NORMAL
FREEZE
Get
07 30
07 30
02 30
02 30
02 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
06 00 CB D3 05 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
83 D2
13 D3
B0 D2
23 F6
B3 F7
E3 F4
E3 EF
73 EE
83 EE
23 E2
10 F6
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
Set
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
Set BOARD(BLACK) BE EF
BOARD(GREEN) BE EF
WHITEBOARD
Daylight Mode
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
PICTURE
MODE
[Example return]
00 00
[Normal]
20 00
01 00
[Cinema]
21 00
04 00
[Dynamic]
10 00
[Custom]
22 00
Get
40 00
[BOARD(BLACK)][BOARD(GREEN)][WHITEBOARD][DAY TIME]
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
89 D2
EF D2
3E D3
02 00
04 00
05 00
03 20
03 20
03 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
BRIGHTNESS
BRIGHTNESS
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
58 D3
06 00
00 70
00 00
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
205
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00 FD D3 02 00
04 20
04 20
04 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
06 00
06 00
9B D3
4A D2
04 00
05 00
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
A4 D2
06 00
01 70
00 00
1 DEFAULT
1 CUSTOM
2 DEFAULT
2 CUSTOM
3 DEFAULT
3 CUSTOM
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
07 E9
07 FD
97 E8
97 FC
67 E8
67 FC
F7 E9
F7 FD
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
80 30
80 30
80 30
80 30
80 30
90 30
90 30
90 30
20 00
10 00
21 00
11 00
22 00
12 00
23 00
13 00
24 00
14 00
25 00
15 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Set
4 DEFAULT
4 CUSTOM
5 DEFAULT
5 CUSTOM
6 DEFAULT
6 CUSTOM
Get
GAMMA
06 00 C7 EB 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
C7 FF
57 EA
57 FE
F4 F0
FB FA
6B FB
9B FB
0B FA
C8 FA
08 FE
6E FE
BF FF
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
Off
9 steps gray scale BE EF
15 steps gray scale BE EF
Set
User Gamma
Pattern
Ramp
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
Get
User Gamma
Point 1
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 1 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
58 C2
06 00
50 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
F4 FF
92 FF
43 FE
02 00
04 00
05 00
91 30
91 30
91 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 2
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 2 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
A4 C3
06 00
51 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
B0 FF
D6 FF
07 FE
02 00
04 00
05 00
92 30
92 30
92 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 3
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 3 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
E0 C3
06 00
52 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
4C FE
2A FE
FB FF
02 00
04 00
05 00
93 30
93 30
93 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 4
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 4 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
1C C2
06 00
53 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
38 FF
5E FF
8F FE
02 00
04 00
05 00
94 30
94 30
94 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 5
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 5 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
68 C3
06 00
54 70
00 00
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
206
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
C4 FE
A2 FE
73 FF
02 00
04 00
05 00
95 30
95 30
95 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 6
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 6 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
94 C2
06 00
55 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
80 FE
E6 FE
37 FF
02 00
04 00
05 00
96 30
96 30
96 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 7
Increment
Decrement
User Gamma
Point 7 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
D0 C2
06 00
56 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
7C FF
1A FF
02 00
04 00
97 30
97 30
97 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
User Gamma
Point 8
Increment
Decrement
06 00 CB FE 05 00
User Gamma
Point 8 Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
2C C3
06 00
57 70
00 00
1 HIGH
1 CUSTOM
2 MID
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
0B F5
CB F8
9B F4
5B F9
6B F4
AB F9
3B F2
FB FF
AB F3
6B FE
5B F3
9B FE
C8 F5
34 F4
52 F4
83 F5
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B1 30
B1 30
B1 30
03 00
13 00
02 00
12 00
01 00
11 00
08 00
18 00
09 00
19 00
0A 00
1A 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
2 CUSTOM
3 LOW
3 CUSTOM
Set
4 Hi-BRIGHT-1
4 CUSTOM
5 Hi-BRIGHT-2
5 CUSTOM
6 Hi-BRIGHT-3
6 CUSTOM
Get
COLOR TEMP
Get
COLOR TEMP
GAIN R
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
GAIN R Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
10 C6
06 00
46 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
70 F4
16 F4
C7 F5
02 00
04 00
05 00
B2 30
B2 30
B2 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN G
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
GAIN G Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00 EC C7 06 00
47 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
8C F5
EA F5
3B F4
02 00
04 00
05 00
B3 30
B3 30
B3 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
COLOR TEMP
GAIN B
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
GAIN B Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
F8 C4
06 00
48 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
04 F5
62 F5
B3 F4
02 00
04 00
05 00
B5 30
B5 30
B5 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
40 C5
06 00
4A 70
00 00
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
207
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
40 F5
26 F5
F7 F4
02 00
04 00
05 00
B6 30
B6 30
B6 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00 BC C4 06 00
4B 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
BC F4
DA F4
0B F5
02 00
04 00
05 00
B7 30
B7 30
B7 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
C8 C5
06 00
4C 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
B5 72
D3 72
02 73
80 D0
49 73
2F 73
FE 72
7C D1
F1 72
97 72
46 73
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 22
02 22
02 22
0A 70
03 22
03 22
03 22
0B 70
01 22
01 22
01 22
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
COLOR
COLOR Reset
TINT
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
TINT Reset
SHARPNESS
Increment
Decrement
SHARPNESS
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
C4 D0
06 00
09 70
00 00
OFF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
0B 22
CB 2F
5B 2E
38 22
0E D7
9E D6
6E D6
FE D7
F2 D6
62 D7
92 D7
02 D6
9E D0
0E D1
3E D6
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
04 33
04 33
04 33
04 33
14 20
14 20
14 20
14 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
08 20
08 20
08 20
08 20
08 20
08 20
09 22
09 22
09 22
00 00
10 00
11 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
01 00
0A 00
09 00
10 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
ACTIVE IRIS
Set
THEATER
PRESENTATION BE EF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
MY MEMORY
Load
Set
Set
MY MEMORY
Save
4:3
16:9
Set
16:10
ASPECT
14:9
06 00 CE D6 01 00
06 00 5E DD 01 00
06 00 AD D0 02 00
NORMAL
Get
Get
06 00
06 00
06 00
91 70
F7 70
26 71
02 00
04 00
05 00
Increment
Decrement
OVER SCAN
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
208
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Execute
Header
03
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
OVER SCAN
Reset
BE EF
06 00 EC D9 06 00
27 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
0D 83
6B 83
BA 82
02 00
04 00
05 00
00 21
00 21
00 21
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
V POSITION
V POSITION
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
E0 D2
06 00
02 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
F1 82
97 82
46 83
02 00
04 00
05 00
01 21
01 21
01 21
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
H POSITION
H POSITION
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
1C D3
06 00
03 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
49 83
2F 83
FE 82
B5 82
D3 82
02 83
68 D2
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
03 21
03 21
03 21
02 21
02 21
02 21
04 70
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Get
H PHASE
Increment
Decrement
Execute
H SIZE
H SIZE Reset
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
Execute
OFF
BE EF
03
06 00
91 D0
06 00
0A 20
00 00
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
4A 72
DA 73
2A 73
79 72
26 72
D6 72
46 73
85 73
0E 72
9E 73
6E 73
FE 72
CE 70
3D 72
4A D7
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
07 22
07 22
07 22
07 22
06 22
06 22
06 22
06 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
17 20
17 20
17 20
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
0A 00
04 00
05 00
09 00
02 00
08 00
07 00
00 00
Set
TV
PROGRESSIVE
VIDEO NR
FILM
Get
LOW
MID
Set
HIGH
Get
AUTO
RGB
Set
Set
SMPTE240
REC709
REC601
Get
COLOR SPACE
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
SCART RGB
Get
06 00 DA D6 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
79 D7
E6 70
86 74
16 75
16 70
26 77
86 71
76 74
75 76
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
AUTO
NTSC
PAL
Set
SECAM
NTSC4.43
M-PAL
S-VIDEO
FORMAT
N-PAL
Get
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
209
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
AUTO
NTSC
PAL
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
A2 70
C2 74
52 75
52 70
62 77
C2 71
32 74
31 76
BA 77
2A 76
DA 76
89 77
86 D8
16 D9
E6 D9
B5 D8
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
13 22
13 22
13 22
13 22
22 20
22 20
22 20
22 20
10 20
10 20
10 20
11 20
11 20
11 20
50 30
50 30
50 30
54 30
54 30
54 30
53 30
53 30
53 30
0A 00
04 00
05 00
09 00
02 00
08 00
07 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
03 00
02 00
00 00
03 00
02 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
Set
SECAM
NTSC4.43
M-PAL
C-VIDEO
FORMAT
N-PAL
Get
AUTO
Set
Set
VIDEO
COMPUTER
Get
HDMI FORMAT
HDMI RANGE
AUTO
NORMAL
ENHANCED
Get
AUTO
06 00 CE D6 01 00
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
SYNC ON G OFF BE EF
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
5E D7
0D D6
32 D7
A2 D6
F1 D7
3B C2
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
COMPUTER IN1
COMPUTER IN2
Get
AUTO
BE EF
BE EF
SYNC ON G OFF BE EF
Get
OFF
ON
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
FRAME LOCK –
COMPUTER IN1
06 00 AB C3 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
08 C2
0B C3
9B C2
38 C3
7F C2
EF C3
4C C2
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
OFF
ON
FRAME LOCK –
COMPUTER IN2
Get
OFF
ON
FRAME LOCK -
HDMI
Get
AUTO
KEYSTONE V
EXECUTE
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
E5 D1
06 00
0D 20
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
B9 D3
02 00
07 20
07 20
07 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
06 00 DF D3 04 00
KEYSTONE V
06 00
0E D2
05 00
KEYSTONE V
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
08 D0
06 00
0C 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
E9 D0
8F D0
5E D1
02 00
04 00
05 00
0B 20
0B 20
0B 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
KEYSTONE H
KEYSTONE H
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
98 D8
06 00
20 70
00 00
Disable
Enable
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FE 88
6E 89
CD 88
31 89
57 89
86 88
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
20 21
20 21
20 21
21 21
21 21
21 21
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Set
PERFECT FIT
Get
Get
PERFECT FIT
Left Top -H
Increment
Decrement
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
210
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
75 89
13 89
C2 88
89 88
EF 88
3E 89
FD 89
9B 89
4A 88
01 88
67 88
B6 89
45 88
23 88
F2 89
B9 89
DF 89
0E 88
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
22 21
22 21
22 21
23 21
23 21
23 21
24 21
24 21
24 21
25 21
25 21
25 21
26 21
26 21
26 21
27 21
27 21
27 21
28 21
28 21
28 21
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Top -V
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Right Top -H
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Right Top -V
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Left Bottom -H
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Left Bottom -V
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Right Bottom -H
Increment
Decrement
Get
AD 8A 02 00
CB 8A 04 00
PERFECT FIT
Right Bottom -V
Increment
Decrement
1A 8B
05 00
PERFECT FIT
All Corners Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
D5 8A
06 00
29 21
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
31 97
57 97
86 96
75 97
13 97
C2 96
89 96
EF 96
3E 97
FD 97
9B 97
4A 96
01 96
67 96
B6 97
45 96
23 96
F2 97
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
41 21
41 21
41 21
42 21
42 21
42 21
43 21
43 21
43 21
44 21
44 21
44 21
45 21
45 21
45 21
46 21
46 21
46 21
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
PERFECT FIT
Left Side
Distortion
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Right Side
Distortion
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Distortion
Position V
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Top Side
Distortion
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Bottom Side
Distortion
Increment
Decrement
Get
PERFECT FIT
Distortion
Position H
Increment
Decrement
PERFECT FIT
All Sides Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
3D 96
06 00
47 21
00 00
OFF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FB 27
6B 26
C8 27
3B 23
AB 22
08 23
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
10 33
10 33
10 33
00 33
00 33
00 33
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
Set
AUTO ECO
MODE
ON
Get
NORMAL
ECO
Set
ECO MODE
Get
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
211
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
NORMAL
H:INVERT
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
C7 D2
57 D3
A7 D3
37 D2
F4 D2
D6 D2
46 D3
E5 D2
3E F4
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 30
01 30
01 30
01 30
01 30
01 60
01 60
01 60
B0 20
B0 20
B0 20
B4 20
B4 20
B4 20
B5 20
B5 20
B5 20
B5 20
B2 20
B2 20
B2 20
B2 20
B1 20
B1 20
B1 20
B1 20
B3 20
B3 20
B3 20
B3 20
BB 20
BB 20
BB 20
BB 20
B6 20
B6 20
B6 20
B6 20
BC 20
BC 20
BC 20
BC 20
BF 20
BF 20
BF 20
BF 20
60 20
60 20
60 20
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
FF 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
0 4 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
FF 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Set
V:INVERT
H&V:INVERT
Get
MIRROR
NORMAL
SAVING
Get
Set
Set
Set
STANDBY
MODE
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN1
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
06 00 CE B5 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
0D F4
CE F7
FE B4
3D F5
F2 F4
32 F6
02 B5
C1 F4
86 F5
46 F7
76 B4
B5 F5
C2 F5
02 F7
32 B4
F1 F5
7A F4
BA F6
8A B5
49 F4
1A F6
DA F4
EA B7
29 F6
B6 F4
76 F6
46 B5
85 F4
6E F7
AE F5
9E B6
5D F7
2A F7
EA F5
DA B6
19 F7
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
MONITOR OUT -
COMPUTER IN2
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
MONITOR OUT
- COMPONENT
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
MONITOR OUT
- S-VIDEO
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
MONITOR OUT
- VIDEO
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2
OFF
Set
Set
Set
Set
MONITOR OUT
- HDMI
Get
COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2
OFF
MONITOR OUT
- LAN
Get
COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2
OFF
MONITOR OUT-
USB TYPE A
Get
COMPUTER1
COMPUTER2
OFF
MONITOR OUT
- USB TYPE B
Get
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
MONITOR OUT
- STANDBY
OFF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
Get
06 00 CD CC 02 00
06 00 AB CC 04 00
06 00 7A CD 05 00
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN1
Increment
Decrement
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
212
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00 FD CD 02 00
06 00 9B CD 04 00
06 00 4A CC 05 00
64 20
64 20
64 20
65 20
65 20
65 20
62 20
62 20
62 20
61 20
61 20
61 20
63 20
63 20
63 20
6B 20
6B 20
6B 20
66 20
66 20
66 20
6C 20
6C 20
6C 20
6F 20
6F 20
6F 20
02 20
02 20
02 20
1C 20
1C 20
1C 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
3B 20
3B 20
3B 20
3B 20
3B 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
VOLUME -
COMPUTER IN2
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00
06 00
01 CC
67 CC
02 00
04 00
VOLUME -
COMPONENT
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00 B6 CD 05 00
06 00
06 00
75 CD
13 CD
02 00
04 00
VOLUME -
S-VIDEO
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00 C2 CC 05 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
31 CD
57 CD
86 CC
89 CC
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
VOLUME -
VIDEO
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00 EF CC 04 00
06 00 3E CD 05 00
06 00 E9 CE 02 00
VOLUME - HDMI
VOLUME - LAN
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
8F CE
5E CF
45 CC
23 CC
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
VOLUME - USB
TYPE A
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00 F2 CD 05 00
06 00 9D CF 02 00
06 00 FB CF 04 00
VOLUME - USB
TYPE B
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00
2A CE
05 00
06 00 D9 CF 02 00
06 00 BF CF 04 00
06 00 6E CE 05 00
VOLUME -
STANDBY
Increment
Decrement
OFF
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
46 D3
D6 D2
75 D3
FE D4
6E D5
5D D5
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
Set
ON
Get
MUTE
ON
Set
Set
OFF
SPEAKER
Get
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
06 00 6E DC 01 00
06 00 9E DC 01 00
06 00 0E DD 01 00
06 00 FE DD 01 00
06 00 CD DD 02 00
06 00 5E DD 01 00
06 00 AE DD 01 00
06 00 3E DC 01 00
06 00 CE DC 01 00
06 00 FD DC 02 00
06 00 DA DF 01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN1
Get
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPUTER IN2
Set
Set
Get
OFF
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
AUDIO3
Get
06 00
4A DE
01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE LAN
06 00 BA DE 01 00
06 00
06 00
2A DF
E9 DF
01 00
02 00
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
213
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
OFF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
76 DD
01 00
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
3C 20
3C 20
3C 20
3C 20
3C 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
3F 20
3F 20
3F 20
3F 20
3F 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
A1 20
A1 20
A1 20
A2 20
A2 20
A2 20
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
20 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
AUDIO1
06 00 E6 DC 01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE - USB
TYPE A
Set
AUDIO2
AUDIO3
Get
06 00
06 00
06 00
16 DC
86 DD
45 DD
01 00
01 00
02 00
OFF
06 00 AE DE 01 00
06 00 3E DF 01 00
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
AUDIO3
Get
AUDIO
SOURCE USB
TYPE B
Set
Set
06 00 CE DF 01 00
06 00 5E DE 01 00
06 00 9D DE 02 00
OFF
06 00 BA DD
01 00
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
AUDIO3
AUDIO_HDMI
Get
06 00 2A DC 01 00
06 00 DA DC 01 00
06 00 4A DD 01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
HDMI
06 00
06 00
7A C4
89 DD
01 00
02 00
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
06 00 A2 DC 01 00
06 00 52 DC 01 00
06 00 C2 DD 01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
COMPONENT
Set
Set
Set
Set
06 00
06 00
32 DD
01 DD
01 00
02 00
Get
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
06 00 D6 DD 01 00
06 00 26 DD 01 00
06 00 B6 DC 01 00
AUDIO
SOURCE -
S-VIDEO
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
46 DC
75 DC
92 DD
62 DD
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
Get
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
AUDIO
SOURCE -
VIDEO
06 00 F2 DC 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
02 DC
31 DC
7A DF
8A DF
1A DE
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
Get
AUDIO IN1
AUDIO IN2
AUDIO IN3
OFF
AUDIO
SOURCE
STANDBY
06 00 EA DE 01 00
06 00 D9 DE 02 00
Get
1
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
AE C6 01 00
Set
Set
2
5E C6
0D C7
02 F1
92 F0
31 F1
75 F1
13 F1
C2 F0
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
HDMI AUDIO
MIC LEVEL
Get
LOW
HIGH
Get
Get
Increment
Decrement
MIC VOLUME
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
214
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
F7 D3
67 D2
97 D2
07 D3
37 D1
A7 D0
57 D0
C7 D1
37 D4
A7 D5
37 DE
57 D5
C7 D4
F7 D6
67 D7
97 D7
07 D6
C4 D3
04 D7
62 D7
B3 D6
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
15 30
15 30
15 30
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
07 00
08 00
09 00
10 00
0A 00
0B 00
0C 00
0D 00
0E 00
0F 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
ITALIANO
NORSK
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUÊS
Set
LANGUAGE
SVENSKA
PУCCKИЙ
SUOMI
POLSKI
TÜRKÇE
Get
Get
MENU
POSITION H
Increment
Decrement
MENU
POSITION H
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00 DC C6 06 00
43 70
00 00
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
40 D7
26 D7
F7 D6
02 00
04 00
05 00
16 30
16 30
16 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
MENU
POSITION V
Increment
Decrement
MENU
POSITION V
Reset
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
A8 C7
06 00
44 70
00 00
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00 FB CA 01 00
06 00 FB E2 01 00
06 00 CB D3 01 00
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
20 30
20 30
20 30
04 30
04 30
04 30
04 30
C0 30
C0 30
C0 30
20 00
40 00
03 00
05 00
06 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
20 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
Set
BLANK
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
6B D0
9B D0
08 D3
FB D8
6B D9
C8 D8
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
OFF
Set
Set
Set
ON
BLANK On/Off
START UP
Get
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
OFF
06 00 CB CB 01 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
0B D2
9B D3
38 D2
3B EF
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
Get
OFF
ON
06 00 AB EE 01 00
06 00 08 EF 02 00
MyScreen Lock
Get
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
215
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232CCommunication/Networkcommandtable(continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
OFF
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
8F D6
1F D7
01 00
01 00
17 30
17 30
17 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
22 30
23 30
23 30
23 30
00 37
00 37
00 37
00 37
01 37
01 37
01 37
02 37
02 37
02 37
02 37
02 37
16 20
16 20
16 20
0F 20
0F 20
0F 20
20 31
20 31
20 31
10 31
10 31
10 31
50 26
50 26
50 26
90 10
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
10 00
11 00
20 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
Set
ON
Get
MESSAGE
06 00 BC D6 02 00
TEST PATTERN
DOT-LINE1
DOT-LINE2
DOT-LINE3
DOT-LINE4
CIRCLE 1
CIRCLE 2
MAP 1
MAP 2
STACK
Get
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
43 D9
D3 D8
23 D8
B3 D9
83 DB
13 DA
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
Set
TEMPLATE
E3 DA 01 00
83 D4
13 D5
83 C0
70 D9
BF D8
2F D9
8C D8
FA 62
6A 63
9A 63
C9 62
06 63
96 62
35 63
D2 62
22 62
B2 63
82 61
71 63
B6 D6
26 D7
85 D6
EA D1
7A D0
D9 D1
3B 89
AB 88
08 89
08 86
6E 86
BF 87
FF 23
6F 22
CC 23
C2 FF
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
OFF
Set
Set
Set
TEMPLATE On/
Off
ON
Get
OFF
ON
C. C. - DISPLAY
C. C. - MODE
AUTO
Get
CAPTIONS
TEXT
Get
1
2
Set
C. C. -
CHANNEL
3
4
Get
OFF
Set
Set
Set
ON
AUTO SEARCH
Get
OFF
AUTO
KEYSTONE
ON
Get
OFF
DIRECT
POWER ON
ON
Get
Get
AUTO POWER
OFF
Increment
Decrement
MOUSE
USB DISPLAY
Get
Set
USB TYPE B
LAMP TIME
Get
LAMP TIME
Reset
FILTER TIME
FILTER TIME
Reset
(continued on next page)
Execute
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
58 DC
C2 F0
98 C6
06 00
02 00
06 00
30 70
A0 10
40 70
00 00
00 00
00 00
Execute
ViewSonic
216
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232CCommunication/Networkcommandtable(continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
3A 33
FA 31
0A 34
9A 30
3A 36
CA 33
6A 30
5A 32
AA 32
9A 2B
5A 3D
AA 29
FA 3E
6A 3F
9A 3F
AA 3D
0A 3E
3A 3C
AA 38
CA 39
9A 3A
9A 24
0A 25
09 33
C6 32
06 30
F6 35
66 31
C6 37
36 32
96 31
A6 33
56 33
66 2A
A6 3C
56 28
06 3F
96 3E
66 3E
56 3C
F6 3F
C6 3D
56 39
36 38
66 3B
66 25
F6 24
F5 32
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
00 00
04 00
0B 00
06 00
0C 00
03 00
05 00
02 00
01 00
22 00
16 00
25 00
10 00
11 00
12 00
15 00
13 00
14 00
19 00
1B 00
1E 00
36 00
37 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
0B 00
06 00
LAN
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
SLIDESHOW
MY IMAGE
MESSENGER
INFORMATION
Set
MY BUTTON-1
AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF
MY MEMORY
ACTIVE IRIS
BE EF
BE EF
PICTURE MODE BE EF
FILTER RESET
AV MUTE
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
TEMPLATE
RESOLUTION
MIC VOLUME
ECO MODE
Get
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
LAN
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B
HDMI
0C 00
03 00
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
05 00
02 00
01 00
22 00
VIDEO
SLIDESHOW
MY IMAGE,
MESSENGER
INFORMATION
16 00
Set
25 00
MY BUTTON-2
10 00
11 00
12 00
15 00
13 00
14 00
19 00
1B 00
1E 00
36 00
37 00
00 00
AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF
MY MEMORY
ACTIVE IRIS
BE EF
BE EF
PICTURE MODE BE EF
FILTER RESET
AV MUTE
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
TEMPLATE
RESOLUTION
MIC VOLUME
ECO MODE
Get
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
217
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type Setting code
COMPUTER IN1 BE EF
COMPUTER IN2 BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FA 38
3A 3A
CA 3F
5A 3B
FA 3D
0A 38
AA 3B
9A 39
6A 39
C9 38
C8 D7
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
20 36
10 30
10 30
10 30
11 30
11 30
11 30
30 26
30 26
30 26
31 26
31 26
31 26
00 35
00 35
00 35
00 35
00 35
00 35
00 00
04 00
0B 00
06 00
0C 00
03 00
05 00
02 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
LAN
USB TYPE A
USB TYPE B
HDMI
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
Set
MY SOURCE
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
Get
Get
Magnify Position
H
Increment
Decrement
Get
06 00 AE D7 04 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
7F D6
34 D6
52 D6
83 D7
FF 3D
6F 3C
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
01 00
01 00
Magnify Position
V
Increment
Decrement
OFF
Set
Set
REMOTE FREQ.
NORMAL
ON
Get
06 00 CC 3D 02 00
OFF
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
03 3C
93 3D
30 3C
3A C3
AA C2
5A C2
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
REMOTE FREQ.
HIGH
ON
Get
OFF
IMAGE-1
IMAGE-2
IMAGE-3
IMAGE-4
Get
Set
MY IMAGE
06 00 CA C3 01 00
06 00
06 00
FA C1
09 C3
01 00
02 00
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-1 Delete
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-2 Delete
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-3 Delete
MY IMAGE
IMAGE-4 Delete
Execute
Execute
Execute
Execute
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
71 C3
35 C3
C9 C2
06 00
06 00
06 00
01 35
02 35
03 35
04 35
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
06 00 BD C3 06 00
(coninued on nexpage)
218
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJLink command
PJLink command
Commands
POWR
Control Description
Parameter or Response
0 = Standby
Power Contorol
1 = Power On
0 = Standby
POWR ?
Power Status inquiry
1 = Power On
2 = Cool Down
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
21 = COMPONENT
22 = S-VIDEO
INPT
Input Source selection 23 = VIDEO
31 = HDMI
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
11 = COMPUTER IN 1
12 = COMPUTER IN 2
21 = COMPONENT
22 = S-VIDEO
23 = VIDEO
INPT ?
Input Source inquiry
31 = HDMI
41 = USB TYPE A
51 = LAN
52 = USB TYPE B
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
AVMT
AV Mute
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
10 = BLANK off
11 = BLANK on
20 = Mute off
AVMT ?
AV Mute inquiry
21 = Mute on
30 = AV Mute off
31 = AV Mute on
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
219
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJLink command (continued)
Commands
Control Description
Parameter or Response
1st byte: Refers to Fan error; one of 0 to 2
2nd byte: Refers to Lamp error; one of 0 to 2
3rd byte: Refers to Temptrature error; one of 0 to
2
4th byte: Refers to Cover error; one of 0 to 2
5th byte: Refers to Filter error; one of 0 to 2
6th byte: Refers to Other error; one of 0 to 2
ERST ?
Error Status inquiry
The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below
0 = Error is not detected; 1 = Warning; 2 =
Error
1st number (digits 1 to 5): Lamp Time
2nd number : 0 = Lamp off, 1 = Lamp on
LAMP ?
Lamp Status inquiry
INST ?
Input Source List inquiry 11 12 21 22 23 31 41 51 52
Responds with the name set in "PROJECTOR
NAME" of "NETWORK"
NAME ?
Projector Name inquiry
Manufucturer's Name
inquiry
INF1 ?
ViewSonic
INF2 ?
INFO ?
CLSS ?
Model Name inquiry
Your model name, "Pro9500".
Other Information inquiry XGA Projector
Class Information inquiry
1
TM
NOTE
• The password used in PJLink is the same as the password set in
the Web Brouwser Comtrol. To use PJLinkTM without authentication, do not set
any password in Web Browser Control.
• For specifications of PJLinkTM, see the web site of the Japan Business
Machine and Information System Industries Association.
URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/
ViewSonic
220
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector
Pro9500
Instant Stack Guide
Thank you for purchasing this product.
This manual is intended to explain only Instant Stack feature.
Other than what is mentioned in this manual, please see
other manuals of this product.
Features
This projector can be used with another projector of the same type to project an
image on the same screen using the Instant Stack feature.
The two projectors can be operated simultaneously to make the image brighter.
Moreover, if you connect two projectors with RS-232C cross-over cable, it turns to
a kind of intellectual stacking system. The two projectors can work alternately by
themselves, and once one projector has an accident the other voluntarily starts to
work to keep your presentation going.
These features, generically called Instant Stack, provide you with the broad use.
WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this
product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference.
►Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product. The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond
normal usage defined in the manuals.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
All the trademarks in this manual are the properties of their respective owners.
ViewSonic
221
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1. Introduction ....................223
1.1 Entries and graphical
symbols explanation.................... 223
3. STACK menu settings....236
3.1 Displaying STACK menu .......... 236
3.2 Selecting Main, Sub or off ........ 237
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode 238
3.4 Selecting lamp switching mode 241
3.5 Selecting input source for Sub.. 242
1.2 Important safety instruction ...... 223
Instant Stack feature........................ 223
General installation.......................... 225
1.3 Basic information
and preparations ......................... 226
3.6 Exiting Intellectual
Stack menu ................................. 243
Instant Stack.................................... 226
Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack. 226
STACK menu................................... 243
Dialog from STACK menu................ 243
Remote control for Intellectual Stack
and Simple Stack ......................... 226
3.7 Important information
for Intellectual Stack.................... 244
Installation styles ............................. 226
Tentative terms for the two projectors226
4. Connecting cables .........247
4.1 Connecting an RS-232C cable. 247
4.2 Connecting signal cables.......... 248
Inputting image from Main to Sub.... 248
2. Installation ......................227
2.1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack 227
2.2 Installing
the first projector (Set A) ............ 228
Inputting image
to Sub and Main individually......... 248
Removing pocket caps .................... 228
Preparing elevator feet .................... 228
Deciding installation position ........... 228
Setting up Set A............................... 229
5. Setting input ports
using menu.......................249
5.1 Preparing for menu operations. 249
5.2 Checking Main projector's
operating status........................... 249
2.3 Installing
the second projector (Set B) ...... 231
5.3 Starting up Main projector ........ 250
5.4 Setting the menu ...................... 251
Stacking the projectors .................... 231
Connecting projectors...................... 231
Setting up Set B............................... 232
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Computer signal......................... 251
2.4 Confirming Main
and Sub settings.......................... 233
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Video signal
(either component or video) ......... 252
2.5 Fine adjusting
image position ............................. 234
Inputting image to
Sub and Main individually............. 252
For Intellectual Stack users ............. 234
For Simple Stack users.................... 235
6. Restrictions
on Schedule function ......254
7. Troubleshooting .............256
ViewSonic
222
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
1.1 Entries and graphical symbols explanation
The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the
product as follows, for safety purpose. Please know their meanings beforehand,
and heed them.
WARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even
death.
CAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical
damage.
NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble.
1.2 Important safety instruction
The followings are important instructions for safely using the product in Instant
Stack. First of all, read the following instructions and be sure to always follow
them when using Instant Stack of this product.
Instant Stack feature
WARNING ► Take a special care not to fall the stacked projectors.
• When stacking two projectors, make sure the elevator feet and heel of the
upper projector are inserted into the corresponding pockets of the lower
projectors.
• When using the Instant Stack function by piling up two projectors, you can
change the projection angle by adjusting the
Pocket cap
elevator feet of the unit that is placed underneath.
Stack pocket
Exercise care to prevent the stacked projector from
falling off or tipping over while adjusting the elevator
feet.
• A maximum of two projectors can be stacked. Do
not stack three or more projectors.
Elevator feet
Cap storage
• Do not install the projectors that are stacked using
the stack pockets, elevator feet and heel of this
projector at a place higher than a person's height.
pocket
Stack
pocket
Lens
adjuster
• Do not install the projectors that are stacked using
the stack pockets, elevator feet and heel of this
projector on a ceiling.
door
• Do not touch the stacked projectors except when
instructions are given in this manual. Do not hit the
projectors with any type of object.
Heel
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
223
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.2 Important safety instruction - For Instant Stack feature (continued)
WARNING ► When removing the pocket caps from the stack pockets, be
sure to store them securely and safely inside the lens adjuster door to prevent
children and pets from swallowing the caps. If swallowed, consult a physician
immediately.
CAUTION ► Be careful not to injure your nail and finger when removing
the pocket caps.
NOTICE ► Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to stack two projectors
or arrange them side by side easily. Depending on the installation and
surrounding environment, images projected from the two projectors may not
superimpose well enough. The images cannot superimpose well enough
especially when the screen is slanted, deformed or the surface is uneven.
• Images projected immediately after turning on the projectors are unstable due
to rising internal temperature. Wait for more than 20 minutes before starting
to adjust the superimposed images.
• The image positions may shift due to temperature change, vibration, or shock
caused by hitting the projector. Install the projectors in a stable environment
when using Instant Stack. If the image positions are shifted, readjust the
images.
• The image positions may shift over time due to the tension and the weight of
the connecting cables. Make sure not to impose any load on the projectors
when arranging the cables.
• If the volume level of the built-in speakers is too high, the two projectors may
resonate, noise may occur and the image quality may deteriorate. In this
case, check the volume setting on both projectors. Lower the volume until the
symptoms disappear or arrange the projectors side by side.
• When two projectors are connected using the RS-232C cable, the Main
projector will be able to control the Sub projector. This feature is known as
Intellectual Stack. When Intellectual Stack by means of RS-232C feature is
used, RS-232C communication cannot be used to control the projector. If you
wish to control the projectors, use the LAN connection that is connected to
any of the projectors.
• When Intellectual Stack is used, the operations or settings of some functions
are restricted. Refer to this manual for details.
ViewSonic
224
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
General installation
WARNING ► Install the projector where you can access the power outlet
easily.
► Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. Install the projector in a
stable horizontal position.
• Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the
manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used.
• For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your
dealer beforehand. Specific mounting accessories and services may be
required.
► Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things.
► Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil,
are used.
► Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet.
CAUTION ► Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other
objects such as a wall. If you install two projectors in Style 2 , keep a space of
30 cm or more between the two projectors.
• Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector’s vent holes.
• Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields, doing
so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction.
► Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers. Especially for an ultrasonic
humidifier, chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and
could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other
problems.
NOTICE ► Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the
projector’s remote sensor.
• Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused.
ViewSonic
225
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.3 Basic information and preparations
Instant Stack
Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to superimpose images projected from
two projectors easily. This projector is designed to provide this feature, with func-
tions to install two projectors and superimpose the images.
Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack
Instant Stack includes the following two features.
When two projectors are connected via an RS-232C cable with necessary set-
tings performed on the projectors, these two projectors will automatically operate
in synchronization with each other according to the settings. This is known as
Intellectual Stack in this manual.
The two projectors operate individually without the RS-232C connection. This is
known as Simple Stack in this manual.
Remote control for Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack
For Intellectual Stack, one projector is set as Main and the other is set as Sub.
Only the Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals. To op-
erate the Sub projector, you need to point the remote control at the Main projector.
For Simple Stack, both projectors can receive the remote control signals. To
avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control, it is recommended to
operate one projector with the remote control and the other with the control panel
on the projector or a wired remote control. In this case, disable the remote control
receiving on the other projector with the KEY LOCK feature. (Operating Guide →
OPTION menu)
Installation styles
Following are two styles to install the projectors. Instant Stack supports both
styles.
Style 1 : Stack vertically
Style 2 : Arrange side by side
The descriptions in this manual are mainly on Style 1 installation. If you wish to
install two projectors in Style 2, refer to the descriptions required in this manual.
Tentative terms for the two projectors
For better understanding of the descriptions in this
manual, the following terms are used when explain-
ing the vertical stacking installation.
Set
B
Set A : Projector placed underneath
Set B : Projector placed on top of Set A
Set
A
ViewSonic
226
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
For safety reasons, read 1.2 Important safety instruction carefully before installa-
tion. In addition, take note of the followings for proper use of Instant Stack.
● When using Intellectual Stack, both projectors will respond to the remote control
signals until STACK MODE on either projector is set to SUB.
During installation, it is recommended to operate one projector with the remote
control and the other with the control panel on the projector or a wired remote
control. In this case, disable the remote control receiving on the other projector
with the KEY LOCK feature. (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
● Images from Set A and Set B may superimpose well but the image positions
can shift over time.
Readjust to superimpose the images.
● If the volume level of the built-in speakers is too high, the two projectors may
resonate, noise may occur and the image quality may deteriorate.
In this case, check the volume setting on both projectors. Lower the volume
until the symptoms disappear or arrange the projectors side by side. If the
image positions are shifted, readjust.
2.1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack
When using Intellectual Stack via RS-232C connection, ensure the following set-
tings are set on the two projectors. Otherwise, the Intellectual Stack menu cannot
be operated.
● STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu: NORMAL
(Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
● COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu: OFF
(Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
● STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF
When STACK LOCK is set to on, menus related to Instant Stack cannot be
operated. It is therefore necessary to set it to off during installation and menu
setting.
(1) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > SECURITY
> STACK LOCK
STACK LOCK dialog will appear on screen. (Operating
Guide → SECURITY menu)
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight OFF, and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
ViewSonic
227
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.2 Installing the first projector (Set A)
Removing pocket caps
When stacking the two projectors, remove the pocket
caps on Set A.
Pocket caps
CAUTION ► It is recommended to use a pin or
the like to remove the caps. If you are using finger,
be careful not to injure your nail and finger.
NOTE • Cap storage pockets for the pocket caps
are inside the lens adjuster door. Be sure to keep
the caps in the storage pockets after removing the
caps from the stack pockets.
To store the cap to the pocket, place the thin end of
the cap into the pocket first, then push the other side
of the cap down firmly to the bottom of the pocket.
It is important to ensure that the caps are securely
stored to prevent children and pets from swallowing
them.
Thin end
pocket
Cap storage
Preparing elevator feet
When stacking the two projectors, set the length of the
elevator feet to the minimum using the elevator but-
tons on Set A and B.
CAUTION ► Be careful when stacking the two
projectors, the projector on top may slide down.
Deciding installation position
Decide the position of Set A and its projection angle. (User’s Manual (concise) →
Arrangement and Adjusting the projector’s elevator.)
NOTE • Set the tilt angle of Set A to within 12 degrees from the level line.
• Take the followings into account when considering the installation position.
VERTICAL adjuster should be set to the upper limit position.
- ZOOM ring should not be set to the widest position.
-
- HORIZONTAL adjuster is recommended to be set near the center position.
ViewSonic
228
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Setting up Set A
1. Turn on Set A.
2. Set the lens position to the upper limit with the VERTICAL adjuster.
NOTE • If it is not set to the upper limit, the image of Set B may not
superimpose well enough to the image of Set A.
• Perform the MIRROR setting first if necessary as it may change the image
position. (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
• HORIZONTAL adjuster is recommended to be set near the center position.
3. Adjust the image of Set A to fit the screen with the VERTICAL adjuster,
HORIZONTAL adjuster, ZOOM ring and FOCUS ring. (User’s Manual (con-
cise) → Displaying the picture)
Adjust the image position using KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT if necessary.
(Operating Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
NOTE • Do not adjust ZOOM ring to the widest position, otherwise the
image of Set B may not superimpose well enough to the image of Set A. Fine
adjusting the image position of Set B electrically does not increase its image
size. Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the image size of Set B to slightly larger
than Set A.
• KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use. To adjust
the image using both KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT, adjust KEYSTONE
first.
• If you are using Simple Stack, go to 2.3 Installation of the second projector
(Set B).
4. Display the menu with the MENU button. (Operating Guide → Using the
menu function)
5. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Op-
erating Guide → OPTION menu)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
229
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.2 Installing the first projector (Set A) - Setting up Set A (continued)
6. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight STACK
MODE, and press the ► button to display
the STACK MODE dialog.
Highlight SUB pressing the ▲/▼ buttons,
and press the ► button.
7. After pressing the ► button, a dialog to
confirm whether or not to save the setting is
displayed.
Press the ► button to complete the setting.
8. If you are using Intellectual Stack, disable the remote control receiving using
KEY LOCK. (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
NOTE • Set A will not be operated by the remote control hereafter. To
avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control, it is recommended to
disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK.
• After the STACK MODE setting is completed, Set A (Sub) will not be able
to receive the remote control signals. When STACK MODE is set to OFF,
enable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK if necessary.
ViewSonic
230
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.3 Installing the second projector (Set B)
Stacking the projectors
1. Place Set B on Set A when stacking the two projectors. Make sure the heel
on the bottom of Set B is inserted into the corresponding pocket on the top of
Set A.
2. With Set B placed on Set A, push
the elevator buttons of Set B to
extend the elevator feet without
lifting Set B. Make sure the ele-
vator feet reach the bottom of the
stack pockets on Set A.
CAUTION ►Be careful when
stacking the two projectors, the
projector on top may slide down.
3. Rotate the elevator feet of Set B
twice in the counterclockwise direction and leave a gap of about 1 mm be-
tween the protrusion at the bottom of Set B and the top of Set A as shown in
the figure.
NOTE • It is necessary to keep Set B slightly away from Set A except for the
heel portion to prevent the two projectors from resonating due to the sound
output from the built-in speakers.
• If Set B is tilt further, the image of Set B may not be superimposed to the
image of Set A.
• If the elevator feet of Set A are used, make sure the tilt angle for both sets is
within 12 degrees from the level line.
Connecting projectors
To use Intellectual Stack, connect an RS-232C cross cable between the
CONTROL port of Set A and Set B.
ViewSonic
231
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Setting up Set B
1. Turn on Set B.
NOTE • After turning on Set B, make sure the image of Set B is not
significantly tilted compared to the image of Set A. If the image is overly
tilted, rotate the elevator feet of Set B to adjust the angle such that the tilt is
just about right. Check again that there is a gap of about 1 mm between the
protrusion at the bottom of Set B and the top of Set A.
2. Reset the adjustment of KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT on Set B. (Operat-
ing Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
NOTE • KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use. To
reset both functions, reset PERFECT FIT first.
• Perform the MIRROR setting first if necessary as it may change the image
position. (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
3. Adjust the image size and position of Set B with the ZOOM ring, VERTICAL
adjuster, HORIZONTAL adjuster and FOCUS ring such that the image can be
superimposed well to the image of Set A.
NOTE • Fine adjustment of the image size and position thereafter with
functions such as KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT does not increase the
image size. It is therefore important to have the image of Set B completely
overlapping the image of Set A.
•
When controlling Set B with the remote control, Set A may also respond to the
remote control. It is recommended to control Set B with the control panel on Set B.
• When two projectors are arranged side by side, adjust the image of Set B to
superimpose well to the image of Set A.
• If you are using Simple Stack, it is recommended to disable the remote
control receiving on Set B using KEY LOCK and operate using the control
panel or a wired remote control as Set A will respond to the remote control.
(Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
• If you are using Simple Stack, go to For Simple Stack users.
4. Display the menu with the MENU button. (Operating Guide → Using the menu
function)
5. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Op-
erating Guide → OPTION menu)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
232
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.3 Installing the second projector (Set B) - Setting up Set B (continued)
6. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight STACK
MODE, and press the ► button to display the
STACK MODE dialog.
Highlight MAIN with the ▲/▼ buttons, and
press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu.
7. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight LAMP
MODE, and press the ► button to display
the LAMP MODE dialog.
Highlight DUAL with the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button.
8. After pressing the ► button, a dialog to
confirm whether or not to save the setting is
displayed.
Press the ► button to complete the setting.
ViewSonic
233
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.4 Confirming Main and Sub settings
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control for Main (Set B).
NOTE • When Intellectual Stack is in use, only Main is capable of receiving
the remote control signals, Sub will not respond to the remote control signals.
2. The following dialogs appear on the lower right screen.
Sub (Set A)
Main (Set B)
3. If you press the ► button, the dialog closes and the Main (Set B) menu will
appear when MAIN is highlighted.
If you press the ◄ button, the dialog closes and the menu will disappear.
NOTE • If these dialogs are not displayed on screen, check the RS-232C
connection and the MAIN or SUB setting in the STACK MODE dialog.
ViewSonic
234
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.5 Fine adjusting image position
To superimpose the images of Main (Set B) and Sub (Set A), fine adjust the im-
age size and position of Main (Set B) using PERFECT FIT.
For Intellectual Stack users
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the
control panel on Main (Set B) to display the MENU
dialog.
Main (Set B)
Highlight MAIN with the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ►
button.
Menu on Main (Set B) will appear.
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons on the remote
control or the control panel on Main (Set B),
select PERFECT FIT from EASY MENU, or
the SETUP menu of ADVANCED MENU.
(Operating Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP
menu)
The image for Intellectual Stack appears on
screen. This image includes a TEMPLATE
screen with the PERFECT FIT dialog from
Main (Set B) and another TEMPLATE screen
from Sub (Set A).
Image from Main (Set B)
3. Using PERFECT FIT on Main (Set B), adjust
the image size and position of Main (Set B) to
superimpose well to the image of Sub (Set A).
(Operating Guide → EASY MENU or OPTION
menu)
Image from Sub (Set A)
It is recommended to adjust in the following
ways.
(1) Roughly adjust the four corners in the
order below.
Top left → Top right
→ Bottom right → Bottom left
(2) Fine adjust the four corners in the same
way.
Superimposed image
NOTE • Refer to NOTES for all users.
ViewSonic
235
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
For Simple Stack users
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control to display the menu on Set A.
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to open the
TEMPLATE dialog, then select STACK on the
dialog. (Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
3. Press the MENU button on the control panel of
Set B to display the menu.
4. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to select
STACK of TEMPLATE
PERFECT FIT from EASY MENU, or the
SETUP menu of ADVANCED MENU. (Operat-
ing Guide → EASY MENU or SETUP menu)
PERFECT FIT dialog appears on screen.
5. Using PERFECT FIT on Set B, adjust the im-
age size and position of Set B to superimpose
well to the image of Set A. It is recommended
to adjust in the following ways.
PERFECT FIT dialog
on STACK of TEMPLATE
(1) Roughly adjust the four corners in the
order below.
Top left → Top right → Bottom right → Bottom left
(2) Fine adjust the four corners in the same way.
NOTES for all users • For details on PERFECT FIT, refer to PERFECT FIT
of EASY MENU or OPTION menu in the Operating Guide.
• When arranging the projectors side by side (Style 2), it is also necessary to
adjust the image position of one projector in accordance with the other projector
as explained above.
• It is strongly recommended to use a flat screen. If a curved or skewed screen
is used, it is very difficult to align the two images even if you use the pin/barrel
adjustment of PERFECT FIT.
• Even through fine adjustment of the images from the two projectors, it may
not be possible to superimpose the images well enough depending on the input
signals. In this case, try the following methods.
- Press the AUTO button on the remote control or execute AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE (Operating Guide → IMAGE menu) on each of the projectors.
- Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION (Operating Guide → IMAGE menu) on
each of the projectors.
- Check the RESOLUTION setting in the INPUT menu, and change to the
same setting if the setting differs between Main and Sub. (Operating Guide →
INPUT menu)
ViewSonic
236
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. STACK menu settings
Set the Intellectual Stack operation using the STACK menu.
NOTE • If you are using Simple Stack without RS-232C connection, skip this
chapter.
• If you do not need to change the settings made during the installation
explained prior to this chapter, go to 3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode.
• Read 3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack carefully.
3.1 Displaying STACK menu
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Operat-
ing Guide → OPTION menu) The setting for
Intellectual Stack operation starts from this menu.
NOTE • Check that the following settings are made on both projectors.
Otherwise, STACK menu on the projectors cannot be operated.
- STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu: NORMAL
(Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
- COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu: OFF
(Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF
ViewSonic
237
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.2 Selecting Main, Sub or off
To enable Intellectual Stack, select either MAIN or SUB. Intellectual Stack starts
when one projector is set to MAIN and the other is set to SUB in the STACK
MODE dialog. To disable Intellectual Stack, select OFF.
1. Highlight STACK MODE in the STACK menu with
the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ► button to
display the STACK MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight MAIN, SUB or OFF.
OFF: Disables Intellectual Stack.
MAIN: Sets the projector to Main that functions as a control tower.
SUB: Sets the projector to Sub that functions as a follower.
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting.
NOTE • After setting Main or Sub, the setting
information can be checked on Web Control.
(Network Guide → Web Control) Select
Projector Status in the main menu of Web
Control. The Stack Mode item shows whether
your projector is set to MAIN or SUB even if
STACK MODE is set to OFF.
ViewSonic
238
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode
Select the DUAL or ALTERNATE lamp operation mode.
1. Highlight LAMP MODE in the STACK menu with
the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ► button to
display the LAMP MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight DUAL or ALTERNATE.
DUAL: Turns on the projectors at the same time.
ALTERNATE: Turns on the projectors alternately.
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting.
NOTE • If DUAL is selected, a menu to select MAIN or SUB appears on
screen when a button on the control panel of the projector or remote control is
pressed. Select the projector that you want to operate. Refer to the examples
below.
- When the MENU button is pressed, a menu to select MAIN or SUB is
displayed. If MAIN is selected, EASY MENU or ADVANCED MENU of the
Main projector is displayed.
- When the KEYSTONE button is pressed, a menu to select MAIN or SUB is
displayed. If MAIN is selected, KEYSTONE menu of the Main projector is
displayed.
• When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE, there are operating restrictions as
follows.
- AUTO POWER OFF and
FREEZE functions on both
projectors are disabled.
- The test patterns for CUSTOM of
Menu to select
GAMMA and COLOR TEMP are
not displayed.
MAIN or SUB
- It takes slightly longer time to
turn on the projectors. This is not
a malfunction.
Menu on Main projector
Menu to select
MAIN or SUB
Menu on Main projector
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
239
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.3 Selecting lamp operation mode (continued)
NOTE • When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE, the images projected
from the Main and Sub projectors may be different. It is recommended to set
the projectors as follows.
- Set the same image for TEMPLATE and START UP on the Main and Sub
projectors.
- Capture the same image for MyScreen on the Main and Sub projectors.
- Save the same image on MY IMAGE on the Main and Sub projectors.
- Set the same message content for the Messenger function (Network Guide →
Messenger Function) on the Main and Sub projectors.
• When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE, image shift can result in image
quality degradation on the screen. Perform the MIRROR setting before
adjusting the image position as the image position will change when the
MIRROR setting is changed. (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
• When ALTERNATE is selected and an error occur on the projector in
operation causing the lamp to turn off, the other projector will automatically start
to operate. However, if the RS-232C cable is disconnected or AC power is not
supplied, the other projector will not turn on.
• In cases when PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR on both projectors
is set to ON (Operating Guide → SECURITY menu), the two projectors will
not turn on even if ALTERNATE is selected. Enter the security code on both
projectors and one of the projectors will turn on.
• When Intellectual Stack is in use, the POWER indicator on the control
panel of the projector operates differently than normal. (Operating Guide →
Troubleshooting) When the Main and Sub projectors are in standby mode, the
Main projector determines which projector to turn on according to the STACK
MODE setting if the STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or control
panel of the Main projector is pressed.
- The POWER indicator on the Main projector blinks in green while the Main
projector determines which projector to turn on.
- If the Main projector is turned on, the POWER indicator on the Main projector
turns to steady green after lighting up, as per normal.
- If the Sub projector is turned on, the POWER indicator on the Main projector
lights in orange after the Sub projector is turned on.
- If an error occurs on the Main projector, the Sub projector turns on and the
POWER indicator on the Main projector lights or blinks in red.
ViewSonic
240
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.4 Selecting lamp switching mode
The following setting is necessary only when ALTERNATE is selected in the
LAMP MODE dialog. Select the AUTO or NORMAL lamp switching mode when
using ALTERNATE.
1. Highlight ALTERNATE MODE in the STACK
menu with the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ►
button to display the ALTERNATE MODE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight AUTO or NORMAL.
AUTO: Turns on the projector with the least lamp usage.
NORMAL: Turns on the projector that was not used the previous time.
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting.
NOTE • The ALTERNATE MODE dialog can be operated on the Main
projector when ALTERNATE is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog.
• To maintain the quality and reliability of the two projectors, the projector with
the most lamp usage may be turned on even if AUTO is selected.
ViewSonic
241
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.5 Selecting input source for Sub
1. Highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE in the STACK
menu with the ▲/▼ buttons, then press the ►
button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons in the dialog to highlight FOLLOW MAIN UNIT or FIXED
(COMPUTER IN 1).
FOLLOW MAIN UNIT: Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the same
port as Main.
FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1): Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the
COMPUTER IN1 port which is connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the
Main projector.
3. Press the ◄ button to return to the previous menu, or press the ► button to
complete the setting.
NOTE • If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, either the COMPUTER IN1
or IN2 port can be selected as an input source on the Main projector. When the
COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the remote control or the INPUT button on
the projector is pressed, the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will be displayed on
screen. Select COMPUTER IN 1 or COMPUTER IN 2 with the ▲/▼ buttons.
• If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, the COMPUTER IN1 port on the
Sub projector should be connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the Main
projector with a computer cable. The image from the selected port is output
from the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector to the COMPUTER IN1
port on the Sub projector. The MONITOR OUT setting on the Main projector
is disabled when FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected. (Operating Guide →
SETUP menu)
• If FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, video signals can be input to the
COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port on the Main projector. Set the port for video
signal input in the COMPUTER IN menu and set the video format in the VIDEO
FORMAT menu. Refer to Inputting image from Main to Sub and Inputting
image from Main to Sub - Video signal (either component or video).
ViewSonic
242
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.6 Exiting Intellectual Stack menu
Before exiting menu operation for Intellectual Stack, it is recommended to check
all the settings in the STACK menu. For dialogs that are called from the STACK
menu, you can press the ◄ button to return to the STACK menu.
Refer to the following to exit menu operation for Intellectual Stack.
STACK menu
When you press the ◄ button (functioning
as RETURN key) after performing some
changes to the settings, a confirmation dialog
will appear.
● Pressing the ► button (functioning as YES
key) in the dialog saves the setting and
closes the dialog. The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied.
Please wait for a while.
● Pressing the ◄ button (functioning as NO key) in the dialog returns you to
the COMMUNICATION menu without saving the setting. (Operating Guide →
OPTION menu → SERVICE)
Dialog from STACK menu
When you press the ► button (functioning as EXIT
key) after performing some changes to the set-
tings, a confirmation dialog will appear.
● Pressing the ► button (functioning as YES
key) in the dialog saves the setting and closes
the dialog. The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied.
Please wait for a while.
● Pressing the ◄ button (functioning as NO key) in the dialog closes the dialog
without saving the setting.
ViewSonic
243
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack
This section provides important information for setting up the Main and Sub
projectors, not explanations on operating the menus. Read all information carefully.
● To use Intellectual Stack, one projector must be set to Main and the other set to
Sub.
● When stacking the two projectors, the control panel of the projector placed
underneath cannot be operated. It is therefore strongly recommended to set the
projector underneath to Sub and the projector on top to Main.
● All buttons except the STANDBY/ON button on the control panel of the Sub
projector are disabled. Operate the projectors with the control panel of the Main
projector or the remote control.
● Pressing the STANDBY/ON button of the Sub projector does not allow you to
turn off only the Sub projector. The Main and Sub projectors turn off when the
button is pressed for more than 3 seconds. And pressing the button does not
turn on the Main or Sub projector.
● The Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals but not the
Sub projector so the remote control should be pointed at the Main projector.
● If a wired remote control is used, connect the cable to the Main projector instead
of the Sub projector.
● For simple PC mouse & keyboard functions, connect both the Main and Sub
projectors to your computer with USB cables. (Operating Guide → Using as a
simple PC mouse & keyboard)
● AUTO SEARCH function is disabled when the projector is used in Intellectual
Stack.
● Network communication to Sub and Web Control on Sub cannot turn on the Sub
projector. The Sub projector can only be controlled through the Main projector.
● Remote Control function on Web Control of the Sub projector is disabled.
(Network Guide → 3.11 Remote Control)
● If you try to turn on the projectors using the Power on & Display on feature on
the Messenger function, the projectors will exit Intellectual Stack and display the
specified message. To start Intellectual Stack again, re-select MAIN/SUB on
both projectors in the STACK MODE dialog, or turn off and on both projectors
again.
● The Main and Sub projectors have the following common settings.
- Muting feature (Operating Guide → Temporarily muting the sound)
- Magnifying feature (Operating Guide → Using the magnify feature)
- ASPECT and OVER SCAN (Operating Guide → IMAGE menu)
- COMPUTER IN (Operating Guide → INPUT menu)
- MESSEAGE (Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
- MY BUTTON (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- TEMPLATE (Operating Guide → SCREEN menu)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
244
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack (continued)
● The following functions are disabled.
- Executing of AUTO KEYSTONE (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
- STANDBY MODE (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
- AUTO SEARCH (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- Turning on/off AUTO KEYSTONE (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- DIRECT POWER ON (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- MY SOURCE (Operating Guide → OPTION menu)
- COMMUNICATION TYPE (Operating Guide → OPTION menu → SERVICE
→ COMMUNICATION)
● The input source from the following ports cannot be selected.
- USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B, LAN
● When Intellectual Stack is in use, an error message will be displayed if an error
occurs on any of the projectors.
When an error occurs, a full dialog will be displayed
on screen. The full dialog changes to a small dialog
after about 20 seconds without any key activity.
While the small dialog is displayed, pressing the ◄
button displays a full dialog again.
Full dialog
The numbers “1” and “2” above the projector icons represent the
Small dialog
Main and Sub projectors respectively.
Refer to the on-screen messages as shown below and take the necessary
actions to resolve the problem.
Example:
Cover Error: Lamp cover is opened.
Lamp Error: Lamp does not light up.
Fan Error: Problem with cooling fan.
Temp Error: Temperature of the projector is too
high.
Air Flow Error: Temperature of the projector is
too high, check that the exhaust vents are not
blocked.
Filter Error: The reading on the filter timer
exceeds the hours set in the FILTER
MESSAGE menu. (Operating Guide →
OPTION menu → SERVICE)
Cold Error: The ambient temperature is too
low.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
245
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STACK menu settings
3.7 Important information for Intellectual Stack (continued)
● If you need to turn off a projector for reasons such as taking corrective actions
for an error, turn off both the projectors so that Intellectual Stack can be started
properly when the projectors are turned on again.
● If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on both
projectors is set to ON, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for
Main first then followed by Sub. If ALTERNATE mode is selected, one of the
projectors will turn off automatically. (Operating Guide → SECURITY menu)
● If the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on one of the
projectors is set to ON, it is necessary to enter the security code as follows
when turning on the projector.
- In DUAL mode, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for the
projector that is locked by the security function.
- In ALTERNATE mode, if the projector locked by the security function is due
to turn on according to the ALTERNATE mode setting, only that projector will
turn on. Otherwise, both projectors will turn on. Enter the security code for
the projector that is locked by the security function. After the security lock is
released, one of the projectors will turn off if both projectors are turned on.
ViewSonic
246
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Connecting cables
To superimpose two images onto one screen, the same image must be input to
the Main and Sub projectors. There are various methods to input the image to the
projectors. This chapter describes the ways of connecting the cables. Read this
chapter to find a method that meets your needs.
NOTE • If Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection is used, the Main
and Sub projectors described below do not exist. Main in this chapter is read
as one projector and Sub as the other projector.
• For details on the specifications of the input ports, refer to Connecting with
your devices (Operating Guide → Setting up) and Connection to the ports.
(Operating Guide - Technical)
4.1 Connecting an RS-232C cable
If you are using Intellectual Stack, connect an RS-232C cross cable between the
RS-232C ports on the Main and Sub projectors. This connection is not required if
you are using Simple Stack.
NOTE • If the RS-232C cable connecting the two projectors operating in
Intellectual Stack is disconnected, the projectors will exit from Intellectual Stack
and start to operate individually. Intellectual Stack will not restart even if the
cable is reconnected. Follow the procedures below to restart Intellectual Stack.
(1) Do not operate the projectors for more than 10 seconds after disconnecting
the cable to allow the projectors to recognize the disconnection of the cable.
(2) Turn off both projectors and allow them to cool sufficiently.
(3) Reconnect the two projectors with the RS-232C cable and turn them on
again. Intellectual Stack will restart.
ViewSonic
247
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting cables
4.2 Connecting signal cables
There are two methods to input image to the Sub projector.
- Inputting image from the MONITOR OUT port on Main to Sub.
- Inputting image to Sub and Main individually.
Inputting image from Main to Sub
Connect the MONITOR OUT port on Main
to the COMPUTER IN1 port on Sub with a
1.
computer cable.
Connect the image output device to one of
the input ports on Main.
2.
NOTES for Intellectual Stack
• COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used
as the input port for the Main projector in
Intellectual Stack. Do not use other ports for
image input.
- You can input component signals to
COMPUTER IN1 and IN2.
- You can input video signals to the Y pin of
the component video of COMPUTER IN1 and
IN2.
Main
Sub
NOTES for Simple Stack
• COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used
as the input port for the projector that is
connected with a computer cable at its
MONITOR OUT port. (Operating Guide
→ SETUP menu) If you wish to use other
input ports, input the image to Sub and Main
Connection example
in Intellectual Stack
individually.
Inputting image to Sub and Main individually
Split the output signal from your image device into two with device such as a
signal splitter.
1.
Connect the output ports of the image output device to the same input ports
on the Main and Sub projectors.
2.
NOTES for Intellectual Stack • LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B
cannot be used as the input ports on the Main projector in Intellectual Stack.
NOTES for Simple Stack • Any of the ports that is compatible with the
signal can be used. Input the same signal to the two projectors individually.
ViewSonic
248
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Setting input ports using menu
5.1 Preparing for menu operations
If Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection is used, press the COMPUTER
or VIDEO button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the control panel
to select the port to which the cable is connected. For setting of MONITOR OUT,
refer to SETUP menu in Operating Guide.
This completes the setting.
If Intellectual Stack with the RS-232C connection is used, all settings or
modifications related to Intellectual Stack menu operations must be performed on
the Main projector. The Main projector functions according to the input settings
for Intellectual Stack.
5.2 Checking Main projector's operating status
For Intellectual Stack, all settings or modifications related to menu operations
must be performed on the Main projector. Before operating the menu for
Intellectual Stack, check if the Main projector is functioning.
Press the MENU button on the remote control.
1.
2.
If the MENU dialog as shown on the right appears on
the screen, the two projectors are operating in DUAL
mode and the Main projector is operating.
Go to 5.4 Setting the menu.
If the dialog does not appear, LAMP MODE is set to ALTERNATE and either
the Main or Sub projector is operating. Go to next.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
3.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION
> STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Op-
erating Guide → OPTION menu)
Check the STACK MODE setting in the STACK menu.
- If MAIN is displayed, the Main projector is operating. Go to 5.4 Setting the
4.
menu.
- If SUB is displayed, the Main projector is turned off and the Sub projector is
operating. Go to 5.3 Starting up Main projector.
ViewSonic
249
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting input ports using menu
5.3 Starting up Main projector
After performing section 5.2 Checking Main projector's operating status, the two
projectors are confirmed to have been set to ALTERNATE mode and the Sub
projector is currently operating. As the settings for Intellectual Stack can be
changed only when the Main projector is operating, this section explains how to
switch from the Sub projector to the Main projector.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
1.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Oper-
ating Guide → OPTION menu)
Check the ALTERNATE MODE setting in the menu.
2.
If NORMAL is displayed, the two projectors are turned on alternately. Therefore,
the Main projector will be turned on if you restart the projectors.
(1) Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or control panel of the
Main projector, the Sub projector will turn off.
(2) After the projector has cooled down, press the STANDBY/ON button to turn on
again. The Main projector will be turned on.
If AUTO is displayed, the projector with the least lamp usage is turned on.
Therefore, the Main projector may not be turned on even if you restart the
projectors. Follow the procedures below to turn on the Main projector.
(1) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight STACK MODE, and press the ► button to
display the STACK MODE dialog.
(2) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight OFF, and then press the ► button to complete
the setting.
(3) Repeat the above procedures to display the STACK MODE dialog again.
(4) Use the ▲/▼ button to highlight SUB, and then press the ► button to
complete the setting.
(5) After exiting the menu, wait for 10 seconds or more.
(6) Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or control panel of the
Main projector, the Sub projector will turn off.
(7) After the projector has cooled down, press the STANDBY/ON button to turn on
again. The Main projector will be turned on even if LAMP MODE has been set
to AUTO.
You can change the settings for Intellectual Stack now that the Main projector
is operating. Go to 5.4 Setting the menu.
3.
NOTE • If the Main projector cannot be turned on due to error or certain
problems, the Sub projector will be turned on even if you follow the procedures
above. Take necessary actions to fix the Main projector, and then change the
settings for Intellectual Stack.
ViewSonic
250
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting input ports using menu
5.4 Setting the menu
If Intellectual Stack with RS-232C connection is used, observe the followings.
When inputting image signals to Sub via Main, the operations differ between using
computer signals and video signals such as component and video signals.
Inputting image from Main to Sub - Computer signal
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
1.
Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to
highlight MAIN, and press the ► button. A menu will be
displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
2.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Oper-
ating Guide → OPTION menu)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight SUB INPUT
SOURCE, and press the ► button to display the
3.
SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1), and press the ►
button to complete the setting.
4.
Press the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the
5.
remote control or the INPUT button on the control
panel of the Main projector, the MAIN INPUT
SOURCE dialog is displayed on screen. Use the
▲/▼ buttons to highlight the port to which the sig-
nal cable is connected, and press the ► button to
complete the setting.
NOTE • When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, the MONITOR OUT
setting is invalid. (Operating Guide → SETUP menu)
• When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, input sources other than
COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 cannot be selected.
• When FIXED (COMPUTER IN 1) is selected, if any button for setting the
input ports including COMPUTER, VIDEO, MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA and
MY BUTTON (assigned with input source related functions) buttons on the
remote control and the INPUT button on the projector is pressed, the dialog for
selecting the input source will be displayed.
ViewSonic
251
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting input ports using menu
Inputting image from Main to Sub
- Video signal (either component or video)
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
1.
Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight MAIN, and
press the ► button. A menu will be displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
Press the MENU button on the remote control
or control panel on the Main projector. Use the
▲/▼/◄/► buttons to open the COMPUTER IN
dialog. (Operating Guide → INPUT menu)
2.
3.
To input component signals to COMPUTER IN1 or IN2, set the port to AUTO.
Then, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to
complete the setting.
To input video signals to COMPUTER IN1 or IN2, set the port to VIDEO. If it
is necessary to select a video format, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight
RETURN and press the ◄ button to display the INPUT menu. Otherwise, use
the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to complete
the setting.
Select VIDEO FORMAT in the INPUT
menu to display the VIDEO FORMAT
dialog.
4.
Select AUTO or an appropriate format for
the video signal input.
Then, use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to highlight EXIT and press the ► button to
complete the setting.
Inputting image to Sub and Main individually
If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen, proceed to 3 below.
1.
Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control.
If the MENU dialog is displayed, use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight MAIN, and
press the ► button. A menu will be displayed.
If the MENU dialog is not displayed, the STACK menu will appear.
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to go into the following menu.
2.
ADVANCED MENU > OPTION
> SERVICE > COMMUNICATION > STACK
STACK menu will appear on screen. (Op-
erating Guide → OPTION menu)
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
252
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting input ports using menu
5.4 Setting the menu - Inputting image to Sub and Main individually (continued)
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE, and press the ►
button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog.
3.
4.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to highlight FOLLOW MAIN
UNIT, and press the ► button to complete the set-
ting.
Press the COMPUTER or VIDEO button on the
remote control or the INPUT button on the con-
trol panel of the Main projector, the MAIN INPUT
SOURCE dialog is displayed on screen. Use the
▲/▼ buttons to highlight the port to which the
signal cable is connected, and press the ► button
to complete the setting.
5.
NOTE • If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, selecting the input source on
either the Main or Sub projector will automatically set the other projector to the
same source.
• If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B
cannot be selected.
• When FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected, if any button for setting the input
ports including COMPUTER, VIDEO, MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA and
MY BUTTON (assigned with input source related functions) buttons on the
remote control and the INPUT button on the projector is pressed, the dialog for
selecting the input source will be displayed.
ViewSonic
253
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Restrictions on Schedule function
This model supports the Schedule function on the Web Control feature. (Network
Guide → 3. Web Control → 3.7 Schedule Settings) There are some restrictions
on the functions when Intellectual Stack with RS-232C connection is used. But for
Simple Stack without an RS-232C connection, there is no restriction on the func-
tions.
Regardless of whether Intellectual Stack or Simple Stack is used, take note of the
Schedule settings before using the Stack function. Unexpected setting changes
may occur when using the Stack function.
Refer to the following for the restrictions concerning Intellectual Stack. If you are
using Simple Stack, skip this chapter.
Restrictions on the Main projector
LAMP MODE
DUAL/
DUAL
ALTERNATE
ALTERNATE
Functions
Main
Sub
ON
ON
ü
ON
OFF
ü
OFF
ON
ü
OFF
OFF
ü
Power
status
Power On
Power Off
ü
ü
ü
ü
Input port change
My Image
Messenger
*1)
ü
ü
X *3)
*1)
ü
ü
X *3)
*1)
*1)
ü
ü
ü
ü
X *2)
X *2)
X *3)
X *2)
X *2)
X *3)
Slide Show
Restrictions on the Sub projector
LAMP MODE
ALTERNATE
DUAL/
ALTERNATE
OFF
DUAL
Functions
Main
Sub
ON
ON
X *3
ü
ON
OFF
X *3
ü
OFF
ON
X *3
ü
Power
status
OFF
X *3
ü
Power On
Power Off
Input port change
My Image
Messenger
*1)
ü
ü
X *3)
*1)
*1)
ü
ü
X *3)
*1)
ü
ü
ü
ü
X *2)
X *2)
X *3)
X *2)
X *2)
X *3)
Slide Show
: This Schedule can be input to Web Control and be executed even if the
ü
projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack.
*1): This Schedule can be input to Web Control even if the projectors are
ü
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
254
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restrictions on Schedule function
6. Restrictions on Schedule function (continued)
operating in Intellectual Stack. If the input port to be changed according to
the Schedule function can be used in Intellectual Stack, the Schedule will be
executed. If not, it will not be executed.
X *2): This Schedule can be input to Web Control when the projectors are
operating in Intellectual Stack but it will not be executed.
X *3): This Schedule can neither be input to Web Control nor be executed when
the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack.
NOTE • If the Schedule is not executed, an error message will be sent in
accordance with the conditions set in Schedule Execution Error on Web
Control. (Network Guide → 3. Web Control → 3.6 Alert Settings)
• If the Schedule function is set to turn off the power when the projectors are
operating in Intellectual Stack, both the Main and Sub projectors will be turned
off.
• If the Schedule function on the Main projector is set to turn on the power, the
projectors will be turned on according to the LAMP MODE setting.
• When the two projectors are operating in the DUAL mode and a menu is being
displayed on one of the projectors, the Schedule function for My Image and
Messenger on the other projector will not be executed.
• Power Off in the table refers to turning off the power and entering into standby
mode according to the Intellectual Stack settings or by pressing the STANDBY/
ON button on the remote control or control panel of the Main projector.
• The projectors cannot be turned on by the Schedule function on the Sub
projector. Set it on the Main projector if necessary.
• When the Sub projector is turned off according to the ALTERNATE MODE
setting, the Schedule function on the Sub projector to turn off its power will be
executed without error.
ViewSonic
255
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Troubleshooting
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it
according to the following table.
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
Reference
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
page
No power is supplied to the Main and Sub
projector.
8
To use the Intellectual Stack feature,
supply AC power to both the Main and Sub
projectors. If AC power is supplied to only
one of the projectors, Intellectual Stack is
disabled.
in User’s
Manual
(concise)
The RS-232C cable between the Main and
Sub projectors is not properly connected.
To use the Intellectual Stack feature, connect
an RS-232C cross cable between the Main
and Sub projectors. If the cable is not
connected, the Main projector cannot control
the Sub projector.
11
Intellectual
Stack does not
function.
The menu settings for Intellectual Stack
are not performed correctly.
Check the settings of the STACK menu on
the Main and Sub projectors. To use the
Intellectual Stack feature, one projector must
be set to Main and the other projector must
be set to Sub.
18
28
Signal cables are not connected correctly.
Check the connection of cables. Also check
that the cable connection matches with the
port settings in the menu.
10 - 14
in Operating
Guide
The RS-232C cable between the Main and
Sub projectors is not properly connected.
The Main and
Sub projector do
not operate in
synchronization.
11
Connect the RS-232C cable properly and
restart the Main projector.
(continued on next page)
ViewSonic
256
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
7. Troubleshooting (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The settings on the projectors are not set
for the Intellectual Stack feature.
Check the following settings on the Main and
Sub projectors.
- STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu:
NORMAL
- COMMUNICATION TYPE under
COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu:
OFF
The STACK
menu cannot
function.
7
6
- STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu: OFF
The remote control is pointed at the Sub
projector.
The projector
does not respond
to the remote
control.
When operating in Intellectual Stack, only
the Main projector is capable of receiving the
remote control signals. Therefore, point at the
Main projector when using the remote control.
The two images are not superimposed
correctly.
The images are
either out of
focus or not well-
superimposed.
Adjust the ZOOM ring, VERTICAL adjuster,
HORISONTAL adjuster and the FOCUS ring
to superimpose the images.
If necessary, adjust PERFECT FIT and
KEYSTONE as well.
8
15
There are some adjustment differences in
the two images.
Try to resolve the problem with the following
measures.
The images
- Press the AUTO button on the remote
control or execute AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE on each of the projectors.
- Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION on
each of the projectors.
24
from the two
projectors do not
superimposed
even after
performing fine
adjustment.
in Operating
Guide
38
in Operating
Guide
42
- Check the RESOLUTION setting in the
INPUT menu, and change to the same
setting if the setting differs between Main
and Sub.
in Operating
Guide
ViewSonic
257
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
End User License Agreement
for the Projector Software
Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software
modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each
of such software modules. The projector also uses software modules that we
have developed or/and produced. And there exist our copyright and intellectual
property for each of such software and related items including but not limited to
the software related documents.
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
These rights above are protected by copyright law and other applicable laws.
And the projector uses software modules licensed as Freeware upon GNU
GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE Version 2.1 established by Free Software Foundation, Inc. (U.S.) or
license agreements for each software.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Refer following web page for license agreements for such software modules and
other software.
中文
web page address: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Contact dealer in your region for inquiry regarding licensed software. Refer
to license agreement of each software in following pages and license
agreements of each software on the web page for detail of the license conditions
and so on. (The original in English is carried since the license agreement
following is established by third party other than us.)
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Because the program (the software module) is licensed free of charge, the
program is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either expressed
or implied, to the extent permitted by applicable law. And we do not take any
responsibility or compensate for loss of any kind (including but not limited to loss
of data, loss of accuracy or loss of compatibility with interface between other
programs) by the software concerned or/and use of the software concerned to
the extent permitted by applicable law.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
258
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Accord de licence d’utilisateur final pour le
logiciel du projecteur
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Le logiciel de ce projecteur est composé de plusieurs modules logiciels
indépendants avec des droits d’auteurs nous appartenant et/ou appartenant à
des tiers pour chacun desdits modules logiciels. Le projecteur utilise également
des modules logiciels que nous avons mis au point et/ou produits. Nous
détenons également des droits d’auteur et de propriété intellectuelle pour chacun
desdits logiciels et des éléments connexes, y compris, mais sans s’y limiter pour
les documents relatifs aux logiciels.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
Les droits susmentionnés sont protégés par la législation sur le copyright et
d’autres lois applicables. Et le projecteur utilise les modules de logiciel accordés
en licence en tant que logiciel libre sous GNU General Public License Version
2 et GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 établis par Free Software
Foundation, Inc. (États-Unis) ou autres accords de licence pour chaque logiciel.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Consultez la page Web suivante pour les accords de licence pour lesdits
modules logiciels et d’autres logiciels.
中文
한국어
Adresse de la page Web: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
SVEN
SKA
Adressez-vous à votre revendeur pour toute question sur les logiciels sous
licence. Consultez les accords de licence de chaque logiciel aux pages suivantes
et les accords de licence de chaque logiciel sur la page Web pour le
détail des conditions de licence, etc. (Étant donné que les accords de licence
suivants sont établis par un tiers autre que nous, ils sont stipulés en anglais.)
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Étant donné que le programme (le module logiciel) est accordé sous licence
gratuitement, le programme est fourni sans aucune garantie, explicite ou
implicite, dans la mesure permise par la loi. Et nous n’assumons aucune
responsabilité ni ne compensons pour la perte de toute sorte (y compris, mais
sans s’y limiter les pertes de données, la perte de précision ou la perte de
compatibilité avec une interface entre d’autres programmes) par le logiciel
concerné et/ou l’utilisation du logiciel concerné dans la mesure permise par la
loi.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
259
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Endbenutzerlizenzvereinbarung für die
Projektorsoftware
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Die Projektorsoftware besteht aus einer Vielzahl unabhängiger Softwaremodule,
und jedes dieser Softwaremodule unterliegt dem Urheberrecht von uns und/oder
dem Urheberrecht Dritter. Der Projektor verwendet zudem durch uns entwickelte
und/oder produzierte Softwaremodule. Für jedes dieser Softwaremodule sowie
deren Zubehör, einschließlich, aber nicht beschränkt auf die zur Software
gehörigen Dokumente, unterliegen dem Urheberrecht und dem geistigen
Eigentumsrecht von uns.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
Die obigen Rechte sind durch das Urheberschutzgesetz und anderes geltendes
Recht geschützt. Zudem verwendet der Projektor Softwaremodule, die unter
GNU General Public License Version 2 und GNU Lesser General Public
License Version 2.1 der Free Software Foundation, Inc. (USA) bzw. unter den
Lizenzvereinbarungen für die einzelnen Softwaremodule als Freeware lizenziert
sind.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
中文
Informationen zu den Lizenzvereinbarungen für derartige Softwaremodule und
sonstige Software finden Sie auf der folgenden Webseite.
한국어
URL: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
SVEN
SKA
Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zu Lizenzsoftware an Ihren Vertragshändler.
Detaillierte Informationen die den Lizenzbedingungen finden Sie in den
Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf den folgenden Seiten
sowie den Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf der Webseite. (Da
die folgenden Lizenzvereinbarungen durch Dritte festgelegt wurden, sind sie im
englischen Original wiedergegeben).
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
Da das Programm (das Softwaremodul) kostenfrei bereitgestellt wird, erfolgt die
Bereitstellung in gesetzlich zulässigem Umfang ohne Mängelgewähr und ohne
Gewährleistung in irgendeiner Form, weder ausdrücklich noch stillschweigend.
Wir schließen in gesetzlich zulässigem Umfang jede Haftung für Verluste
irgendeiner Art (einschließlich, jedoch nicht beschränkt auf den Verlust von
Daten, Genauigkeit oder Kompatibilität mit anderen Programmen) durch die
betreffende Software und/oder die Verwendung der betreffenden Software aus.
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
260
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final para el
software del proyector
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
El software incluido en el proyector consta del número plural de módulos de
software independientes y contamos con nuestro derecho de reproducción y/
o los derechos de reproducción de terceros para cada uno de los módulos
del software. El proyector también utiliza módulos de software que hemos
desarrollado y/o producido. Contamos con derechos de reproducción y
propiedad intelectual para cada uno de los software y elementos relacionados,
incluidos, a título de ejemplo, los documentos relacionados con el software.
DEU
TSCH
ESP
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
Los derechos de arriba están protegidos por la ley de derechos de reproducción
y otras leyes aplicables. Y el proyector utiliza módulos de software con licencia
como freeware en la GNU General Public License Version 2 y la GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2.1 establecida por Free Software Foundation,
Inc. (EE.UU.) o acuerdos de licencia para cada software.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Consulte los acuerdos de licencia de dichos módulos de software y otro software
en la siguiente página Web.
中文
한국어
Dirección de la página Web: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
SVEN
SKA
Si tiene alguna duda sobre el software otorgado bajo licencia, póngase en
contacto con su distribuidor. Para conocer los detalles de las condiciones de
licencia y otras cosas, consulte los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en
las siguientes páginas y los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en la
página Web. (Como los siguientes acuerdos de licencia han sido establecidos
por un tercero diferente a nosotros, se indican en su original, en inglés.)
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
Como la licencia del programa (el módulo de software) se concede
gratuitamente, el programa se ofrece sin garantías de ningún tipo, bien expresas
o implícitas, en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable. Y no aceptamos ninguna
responsabilidad ni compensamos por pérdidas de ningún tipo (incluido, a título
de ejemplo, pérdida de datos, pérdida de precisión o pérdida de compatibilidad
con interfaz entre otros programas) por parte del software en cuestión y/o la
utilización del software en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable.
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
261
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Accordo di licenza dell'utente finale per il
software del proiettore
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Il software del proiettore è costituito da diversi moduli software indipendenti,
su ognuno dei quali sussiste il nostro copyright e/o i copyright di terzi. Inoltre,
il proiettore utilizza moduli software sviluppati e/o prodotti da noi. Il nostro
copyright e la nostra proprietà intellettuale si applicano a ciascuno di questi
software e ai prodotti annessi, compresi, ma non limitati, ai documenti relativi ai
software.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
I diritti di cui sopra sono tutelati dalla legge sul copyright e dalle altre leggi
applicabili. Il proiettore utilizza moduli software concessi in licenza come
freeware in conformità alla GNU General Public License Version 2 e alla
GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, stabilite dalla Free Software
Foundation, Inc. (Stati Uniti) o dagli accordi di licenza per ciascun software.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Consultare la seguente pagina web per gli accordi di licenza relativi a tali moduli
software e ad altri software.
中文
Indirizzo pagina web: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Rivolgersi al rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni riguardanti il software concesso
in licenza. Consultare gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software alle seguenti
pagine e gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software sulla pagina web per
informazioni sulle condizioni di licenza e così via. (Siccome i seguenti accordi
di licenza sono stabiliti da un terzo e non da noi, sono riportati nella versione
originale in lingua inglese.)
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Siccome il programma (il modulo software) è concesso in licenza a titolo
gratuito, il programma viene fornito così com'è, senza garanzia di alcun tipo, né
espressa né implicita, nei limiti consentiti dalla legge applicabile. Inoltre, non ci
assumiamo responsabilità alcuna e non provvederemo ad alcun risarcimento
per qualsivoglia perdita (compresa, ma non limitata a, perdita di dati, perdita di
precisione o perdita di compatibilità con l'interfaccia tra altri programmi) risultante
dal software in oggetto e/o dall'utilizzo di tale software, nei limiti consentiti dalla
legge applicabile.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
262
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Avtale om sluttbrukerlisens for projektorens
programvare
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Programvaren i projektoren består av flere uavhengige programvaremoduler
og våre opphavsrettigheter og/eller tredjeparts opphavsrettigheter finnes for
hver slik programvaremodul. Projektoren bruker også programvaremoduler
som vi har utviklet og/eller laget. Og våre opphavsrettigheter og åndsverk for
hver slik programvare og relaterte enheter inkludert, men ikke begrenset til
programvarerelaterte dokumenter finnes.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
Rettighetene over er beskyttet av lover om opphavsrettighet og andre
tilgjengelige lover. Og projektoren bruker programvaremoduler som er lisensiert
under GNU General Public Lisence Version 2 og GNU Lesser General Public
Version 2.1, etablert av Free Software Foundation, inc (U.S.A) eller lisensavtaler
for hver programvare.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Se den følgende websiden for lisensavtaler for slike programvaremoduler og
annen programvare.
中文
Webadresse: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Kontakt din forhandler for innspill angående lisensiert programvare.
Se lisensavtalene for hver programvare i de følgende sidene
og lisensavtalene for hver programvare på websiden for detaljer om
lisensforholdene og så videre. (Ettersom de følgende lisensavtalene er etablert
av en tredjepart er de oppgitt på originalspråket engelsk).
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Fordi programmet (Programvaremodulen) er lisensiert gratis, er programmet
utgitt uten noen garanti, enten uttrykt eller underforstått, i den utstrekning loven
tillater. Og vi tar intet ansvar eller kompenserer for noe tap (inkludert, men
ikke begrenset til tap av data, tap av nøyaktighet eller kompatibilitetstap med
grensesnittet mellom andre programmer) av programvaren det gjelder og/eller
bruk av programvaren det gjelder i den utstrekning loven tillater.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
263
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Gebruiksrechtovereenkomst (EULA) voor
de projectorsoftware
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
De software in de projector bestaat uit verschillende onafhankelijke
softwaremodules waarop ons auteursrecht en/of dat van derden is gevestigd.
De projector gebruikt ook softwaremodules die wij hebben ontwikkeld en/
of geproduceerd. En op zulke software en aanverwante producten, maar niet
beperkt tot documenten die betrekking hebben op software, is ook ons auteurs-
en intellectuele eigendomsrecht gevestigd.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
Bovenstaande rechten worden beschermd door de wet inzake auteursrecht en
ander toepasselijk recht. En de projector gebruikt softwaremodules die staan
geregistreerd als freeware volgens GNU General Public License Version 2 en
GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 van Free Software Foundation,
Inc. (VS) of gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten voor elke software.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Raadpleeg de volgende webpagina voor de gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten
betreffende zulke softwaremodules en andere software.
中文
Webpagina: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Neem contact op met uw dealer voor inlichtingen betreffende
software waarop een gebruiksrecht is gevestigd. Raadpleeg de
gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de volgende pagina’s
en gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de webpagina
voor meer details over de gebruiksvoorwaarden enz. (Aangezien de volgende
gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten niet door ons, maar door derden werden
opgesteld, zijn ze oorspronkelijk opgesteld in de Engelse taal.)
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
Omdat het programma (de softwaremodule) een gratis gebruiksrecht heeft,
wordt het programma zo ter beschikking gesteld zonder enige garantie,
uitdrukkelijk noch impliciet, voor zover bij wet toegestaan. En we aanvaarden
geen aansprakelijkheid noch betalen een schadevergoeding uit voor eventueel
verlies (inclusief, maar niet beperkt tot verlies van gegevens, nauwkeurigheid of
compatibiliteit met interface tussen andere programma’s) door de respectieve
software en/of het gebruik van de respectieve software voor zover bij wet
toegestaan.
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
264
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Contrato de licença do utilizador final para
o software do projector
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Software no projector consiste no número plural de módulos de software
independentes e aí residem os nossos direitos de autor e/ou direitos de autor
de terceiros para cada um desses módulos de software. O projector também
utiliza módulos de software que desenvolvemos e/ou produzimos. E aí residem
os nossos direitos de autor e propriedade intelectual para esse software e itens
relacionados mas não limitados aos documentos relacionados com o software.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
Os direitos acima estão protegidos pela lei de direitos de autor e outras leis
aplicáveis. E o projector utiliza módulos de software licenciados como freeware
de acordo com GNU General Public License Version 2 e GNU Lesser General
Public License Version 2.1 estabelecidas pela Free Software Foundation, Inc.
(E.U.A.) ou contratos de licença para cada software.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Consulte a página de Internet seguinte para contratos de licença para tais
módulos de software e outro software.
中文
Endereço da página de Internet: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Em caso de dúvidas, contacte o seu revendedor relativamente ao software
licenciado. Consulte os contratos de licença de cada software nas páginas
seguintes e contratos de licença de cada software na página de Internet
para detalhes sobre as condições da licença e assim por diante. (Uma vez que
os contratos de licença seguintes são estabelecidos por terceiros, estes são
declarados no inglês original.)
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Uma vez que o programa (módulo de software) é licenciado gratuitamente, o
programa é fornecido tal como está sem qualquer tipo de garantia, expressa ou
implícita, até ao limite permitido pela lei aplicável. E não nos responsabilizamos
nem compensamos por qualquer tipo de perda (incluindo mas não limitado a
perda de dados, perda de precisão ou perda de compatibilidade com a interface
entre outros programas) pelo software em questão e/ou utilização do software
em questão até ao limite permitido pela lei aplicável.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
265
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
投影机软件的终端用户许可协议
ENGLISH
投影机的软件包含多个独立软件模块，每个软件模块均拥有我们的版权和/或第
三方的版权。 投影机还使用我们开发或/和制造的软件模块。 各软件和相关产
品均拥有我们的版权和知识产权，包括但不仅限于软件相关文档。
FRAN
ÇAIS
DEU
TSCH
以上权利受版权法律和其他适用法律的保护。 基于 Free Software Foundation,
Inc. (U.S.) 制定的 GNU General Public License Version 2 和 GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2.1 或者各软件的许可协议，投影机使用的软
件模块作为自由软件许可使用。
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
有关这些软件模块和其他软件的许可协议，请参阅以下网页。
NOR
SK
网页地址：http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
NEDER
LANDS
请联系您的经销商了解许可软件的相关问题。 有关许可条件等问题的详情，请参
阅以下各页中各软件的许可协议以及网页上各软件的许可协议。（由于以
下许可协议由第三方而非我们制定，这些协议以英文原文陈述。）
POR
TUGUÊS
中文
程序（软件模块）的许可使用并不收费，因此在适用法律允许的范围内，提供程
序时我们不作任何明示或暗示的保证。 在适用法律许可的范围内，对于相关软件
和/或相关软件的使用导致的任何损失（包括但不仅限于数据丢失、精确性降低
或无法与其他程序界面兼容），我们不承担责任或赔偿。
한국어
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
266
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
프로젝터 소프트웨어 최종 사용자 라이센스 계약
ENGLISH
프로젝터의 소프트웨어는 여러 개의 독립적인 소프트웨어 모듈로 구성되며 각
소프트웨어 모듈에는 당사 및 / 또는 타사의 저작권이 존재합니다 . 본 프로젝터
는 당사에서 개발 및 / 또는 제작한 소프트웨어 모듈도사용합니다 . 또한 모든
소프트웨어와 소프트웨어 관련 문서 ( 이에 한정되지 않음 ) 를 포함한 관련 항목
에는 당사의 저작권과 지적 재산권이 존재합니다 .
FRAN
ÇAIS
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
위의 권리들은 저작권법과 기타 적용 가능한 법률에 의해 보호됩니다 . 또한 본
프로젝터는 Free Software Foundation, Inc.( 미국 ) 에서 만든 GNU General
Public License Version 2 및 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
또는 각 소프트웨어의 라이센스 계약에 의거하여 프리웨어로 사용 허가를 받았
습니다 .
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
그러한 소프트웨어 모듈과 기타 소프트웨어의 라이센스 계약은 다음 웹 페이지
를 참조하십시오 .
POR
TUGUÊS
웹 페이지 주소 : http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
中文
사용 허가된 소프트웨어에 대해 궁금한 사항이 있을 경우 대리점에 문의하십시
오 . 라이센스 조건 등에 대한 자세한 내용은 다음 페이지 의 각 소프트웨
어 라이센스 계약 및 웹 페이지의 각 소프트웨어 라이센스 계약을 참조하십시오
. ( 다음 라이센스 계약은 당사가 아닌 타사에서작성한 것이므로 원본 영문으로
표시됩니다 .)
한국어
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
본 프로그램 ( 소프트웨어 모듈 ) 은 무료로 사용이 허가되었으므로 적용법률이
허용하는 한도 내에서 어떠한 명시적 또는 묵시적 보증 없이 있는 그대로 제공됩
니다 . 또한 당사는 적용 법률이 허용하는 한도 내에서데이터 손실 , 정확성 결핍
또는 다른 프로그램들을 연결하는 인터페이스 와의 호환성 결핍 ( 이에 한정되지
않음 ) 등 소프트웨어 및 / 또는 소프트웨어 사용으로 인한 손실에 대해 책임을 지
거나 보상하지 않습니다 .
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
267
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Slutanvändarlicensavtal för projektorns
programvara
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Programvaran i projektorn består av flera olika oberoende programvarumoduler
och vår upphovsrätt och/eller tredje parts upphovsrätter existerar för var och
en av dessa programvarumoduler. Projektorn har även programvarumoduler
som har utvecklats och/eller skapats. Vår upphovsrätt och intellektuell egendom
existerar för var och en av sådana programvaror och relaterade föremål,
inklusive, men inte begränsat till, programvarans relaterade dokument.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
Ovanstående rättigheter skyddas av upphovsrättslag och andra tillämpliga
lagar. Projektorn använder programvarumoduler som är licensierade som
gratisprogram enligt GNU General Public License Version 2 och GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2.1 utvecklade av Free Software Foundation,
Inc. (USA.) eller licensavtal för varje programvara.
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
Se följande webbsida för licensavtal för sådana programvarumoduler och andra
programvaror.
中文
Webbsida: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
한국어
Kontakta din återförsäljare för frågor angående licensierad programvara. Se
licensavtal för varje programvara på följande sidor och licensavtal för
varje programvara på webbsidan för detaljer om licensvillkor och så vidare.
(Eftersom följande licensavtal upprättats av en tredje part och inte av oss, är
originaltexten på engelska.)
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Eftersom programmet (programvarumodulen) är licensierad som gratisprogram,
levereras programmet i befintligt skick utan någon typ av garanti, vare sig
uttryckt eller underförstådd, till den omfattning som är tillåtet enligt tillämplig lag.
Vi åtar oss inget ansvar eller kompensation för förlust av något slag (inklusive
men inte begränsat till förlust av data, exakthet eller kompabilitet med gränssnitt
mellan andra program) för den programvara som avses och/eller bruk av den
programvara som avses till den omfattning som är tillåtet enligt tillämplig lag.
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
268
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Лицензионное соглашение с конечным пользователем об
использовании программного обеспечения проектора
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
Программное обеспечение проектора состоит из нескольких самостоятельных
модулей программного обеспечения; при этом авторские права и/или авторские
права третьих сторон существуют в отношении каждого из подобных модулей
программного обеспечения. Проектор также использует программное обеспечение,
разработанное и/или предоставленное нашей компанией. Мы располагаем
авторскими правами и правами на интеллектуальную собственность в отношении
каждого подобного программного обеспечения и связанных с ним материалов,
включая, в частности, документацию по программному обеспечению.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
Вышеуказанные права защищаются законом об авторских правах и другими
применимыми законами. Проектор также использует модули программного
обеспечения, распространяемые бесплатно в соответствии с GNU General Public
License Version 2, и GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, используемыми
компанией Free Software Foundation, Inc. (CША) или лицензионными соглашениями
на каждое программное обеспечение.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
中文
Лицензионные соглашения для подобных модулей программного
обеспечения и другого программного обеспечения приведены на следующей веб-
странице.
한국어
SVEN
SKA
Адрес веб-страницы: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
РУСС
КИЙ
Информацию о лицензированном программном обеспечении можно получить
у дилера. Подробные данные по условиям лицензирования и другим вопросам
приведены в лицензионных соглашениях по каждому программному обеспечению,
приведенных на следующих страницах, и лицензионных соглашениях по
каждому программному обеспечению, приведенных на веб-странице. (Поскольку
следующие лицензионные соглашения предоставлены третьими сторонами,
приводятся их оригинальные тексты на английском языке.)
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
Поскольку программа (модуль программного обеспечения) предоставляется
бесплатно, она предоставляется на условиях "как есть", без каких- либо прямых
или косвенных гарантий какого-либо рода в той степени, в которой это разрешается
применимым законодательством. Мы также не несем ответственности и не
предоставляем компенсаций за какие-либо потери (включая, в частности,
потерю данных, искажение или отсутствие совместимости интерфейса с другими
программами) соответствующего программного обеспечения и/или за использование
соответствующего программного обеспечения в той степени, в которой это
разрешается применимым законодательством.
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
269
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Projektoriohjelmiston käyttöoikeussopimus
ENGLISH
Projektorin ohjelmisto koostuu useista itsenäisistä ohjelmistomoduuleista,
jotka on suojattu yrityksemme ja/tai kolmannen osapuolen tekijänoikeuksilla.
Projektori käyttää myös ohjelmistomoduuleja, jotka olemme kehittäneet ja/
tai tuottaneet. Kukin ohjelmisto ja niihin liittyvät osat, mukaan lukien mutta
ei rajoittuen ohjelmistoon liittyvät asiakirjat, on suojattu tekijänoikeuksilla ja
immateriaalioikeuksilla.
FRAN
ÇAIS
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
Edellä mainitut oikeudet on suojattu tekijänoikeuslailla ja muilla soveltuvilla
lailla. Projektori käyttää Free Software Foundation, Inc:n (USA)
ilmaisohjelmistomoduuleja GNU General Public License Version 2 ja GNU Lesser
General Public License Version 2.1 tai kunkin ohjelmiston lisenssisopimuksia.
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
Seuraavalta verkkosivulta saat lisätietoja kyseisten ohjelmistomoduulien ja
muiden ohjelmistojen lisenssisopimuksista.
POR
TUGUÊS
Verkkosivun osoite: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
中文
Ota yhteys myyjään saadaksesi tietoa käyttöoikeuksin suojatusta ohjelmistosta.
Katso kunkin ohjelmiston käyttöoikeussopimus seuraavilta sivuilta
ja käyttöoikeussopimusten yksityiskohtaiset tiedot kunkin ohjelmiston
verkkosivuilta. (Seuraavat käyttöoikeussopimukset ovat vain englanniksi, koska
ne ovat kolmannen osapuolten sopimuksia.)
한국어
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
Koska ohjelma (ohjelmistomoduuli) on ilmaisohjelmisto, se toimitetaan
sellaisenaan ilman minkäänlaista suoraa tai epäsuoraa takuuta sovellettavan
lain sallimissa rajoissa. Emme ota vastuuta tai korvaa mitään menetystä
(mukaan lukien mutta ei rajoittuen tietojen menetystä, tarkkuuden menetystä tai
muiden ohjelmien välisen yhteensopivuuden menetystä) ohjelmiston osalta ja/tai
ohjelmiston käytön osalta sovellettavan lain sallimissa rajoissa.
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
270
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
Umowa licencyjna użytkownika końcowego
oprogramowania projektora
Oprogramowanie projektora składa się z pewnej liczby niezależnych modułów
oprogramowania a każdy z takich modułów jest objęty naszym prawem
autorskim lub prawem autorskim strony trzeciej. Projektor korzysta również z
modułów oprogramowania, które stworzyliśmy i/lub wyprodukowaliśmy. Każde
takie oprogramowanie oraz powiązane elementy włączając, ale nie ograniczając
się do, dokumentacji oprogramowania, objęte jest prawem autorskim i prawami
własności intelektualnej.
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
ANO
NOR
SK
Powyższe prawa są chronione prawem autorskim i innymi mającymi
zastosowanie prawami. Ponadto projektor korzysta z bezpłatnych modułów
oprogramowania licencjonowanych na zasadzie GNU General Public License
Version 2 i GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 ustanowionych
przez Free Software Foundation, Inc. (U.S.) lub porozumień licencyjnych dla
poszczególnych programów.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
中文
Umowy licencyjne dla takich modułów oprogramowania oraz innego
oprogramowania można znaleźć na poniższej stronie internetowej.
한국어
Adres strony internetowej: http://www.viewsonic.com/products/pro9500.htm
SVEN
SKA
Pytania dotyczące licencjowanego oprogramowania można kierować do
swojego sprzedawcy. Szczegóły warunków licencji oraz podobne informacje
dotyczące umów licencyjnych dla każdego oprogramowania można znaleźć
na następujących stronach lub na stronach internetowych. (Ponieważ
następujące umowy licencyjne zostały sporządzone prze strony trzecie,
pozostają w oryginalnym języku angielskim.)
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
POL
SKI
Ponieważ ten program (moduł oprogramowania) jest na bezpłatnej licencji,
dostarczany jest bez żadnych gwarancji, jasno wyrażonych lub implikowanych,
w pełnym zakresie dopuszczonym prawem. Nie bierzemy żadnej
odpowiedzialności ani nie rekompensujemy żadnych strat (włączając ale nie
ograniczając się do utraty danych, utraty precyzji lub utraty kompatybilności
pomiędzy innymi programami) spowodowanych przez rzeczone oprogramowanie
i/lub wykorzystanie rzeczonego oprogramowania w zakresie dopuszczonym
przez mające zastosowanie prawo.
License
Agreement
ViewSonic
271
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
ENGLISH
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
FRAN
ÇAIS
"modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Preamble
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act
of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
on the Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program
does.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General
Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share
and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all
its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation
software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
ITALI
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence
of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a
copy of this License along with the Program.
ANO
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code
or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do
these things.
NOR
SK
NEDER
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
for a fee.
LANDS
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you
if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
POR
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms
of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:
TUGUÊS
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.
中文
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
한국어
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software,
and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to
copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program
or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge
to all third parties under the terms of this License.
SVEN
SKA
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make
certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this
free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
РУСС
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to
print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling
the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if
the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is
not required to print an announcement.)
КИЙ
SUO
MI
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear
that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not
licensed at all.
POL
SKI
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
to those sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
License
Agreement
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work,
and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim
or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is
to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
ViewSonic
272
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
other work under the scope of this License.
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations
under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on
it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of
the following:
ENGLISH
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could
satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from
distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held
invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances.
FRAN
ÇAIS
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machin-
ereadable source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange; or,
DEU
TSCH
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a
complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
ESPA
ÑOL
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe
any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee
cannot impose that choice.
ITALI
ANO
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution
and only if you received the program in object code
or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
NOR
SK
NEDER
LANDS
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the executable. However,
as a special exception, the source code distributed need not
include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
POR
TUGUÊS
中文
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or
new versions of the General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
한국어
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
SVEN
SKA
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
Program specifies a version number of this License which applies
to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
РУСС
КИЙ
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
SUO
MI
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions
for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
POL
SKI
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore,
by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on
the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to
do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or
modifying the Program or works based on it.
License
NO WARRANTY
Agreement
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
"AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based
on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license
from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any
further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they
do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
ViewSonic
273
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers)
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
written by James Hacker.
ENGLISH
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
FRAN
ÇAIS
This General Public License does not permit incorporating
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License
instead of this License.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
ITALI
ANO
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this
is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and
change under these terms.
NOR
SK
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at
least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
NEDER
LANDS
POR
TUGUÊS
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what
it does.>
Copyright © <year> <name of author>
中文
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version
2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
한국어
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston,
SUO
MI
MA 02110-1301 USA
POL
SKI
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and
paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like
this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show
c' for details.
License
Agreement
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of
course, the commands you use may be called something other
than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or
menu items-- whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
ViewSonic
274
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]
DEU
TSCH
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking
only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The
Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking
other code with the library.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General
Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share
and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all
its users.
ESPA
ÑOL
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-
free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However,
the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special
circumstances.
ITALI
ANO
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to
some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of
the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to
use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License
is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the
explanations below.
NOR
SK
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it
becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs
must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a
free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries.
In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
NEDER
LANDS
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom
of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the
software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
are informed that you can do these things.
POR
TUGUÊS
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-
free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large
body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU
C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use
the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/
Linux operating system.
中文
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender
these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities
for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
한국어
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we
gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can
relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of
the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that
is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to
run that program using a modified version of the Library.
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between
a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas
the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
SUO
MI
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright
the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
POL
SKI
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should
know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that
might be introduced by others.
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or
other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under
the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this
License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
License
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence
of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company
cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining
a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that
any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Agreement
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on
the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU
Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public
License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit
linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code
ViewSonic
275
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the
Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.)
Do not make any other change in these notices.
ENGLISH
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library
in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the
Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
FRAN
ÇAIS
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to
all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
DEU
TSCH
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided
that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence
of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with
the Library
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
the Library into a program that is not a library.
ESPA
ÑOL
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that
you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
ITALI
ANO
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
for a fee.
NOR
SK
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms
of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:
NEDER
LANDS
POR
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled
or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such
a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
TUGUÊS
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
中文
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because
it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses
the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
한국어
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
table of data to be supplied by an application program that
uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when
the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent
of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that
any application-supplied function or table used by this
function must be optional: if the application does not supply
it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
SVEN
SKA
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header
file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be
a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can
be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
POL
SKI
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
dentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
to those sections when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole
must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every
part regardless of who wrote it.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section
6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
License
Agreement
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also
combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to
produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms
permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
derivative or collective works based on the Library.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work
that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License.
If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well
as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also,
you must do one of these things:
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General
ViewSonic
276
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be
distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files in
the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore,
by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on
the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do
so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or
modifying the Library or works based on it.
ENGLISH
FRAN
ÇAIS
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on
the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any
further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
DEU
TSCH
ESPA
ÑOL
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with
the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's
computer system, rather than copying library functions into
the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the version
that the work was made with.
ITALI
ANO
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of
patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
NOR
SK
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give the same user the materials specified in
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
NEDER
LANDS
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy
the above specified materials from the same place.
POR
TUGUÊS
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended
to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
中文
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses
the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed
for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special
exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of
the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
한국어
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe
any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee
cannot impose that choice.
SVEN
SKA
РУСС
КИЙ
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means
you cannot use both them and the Library together in an
executable that you distribute.
SUO
MI
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on
the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other
library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such
a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the
work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
the original copyright holder who places the Library under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
POL
SKI
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same
work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of
the Sections above.
License
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or
new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library does not specify a license version number, you
may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
Agreement
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the
same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
the Library except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have
their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For
ViewSonic
277
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement for the Projector Software
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
ENGLISH
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.
It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should
have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full
notice is found.
FRAN
ÇAIS
NO WARRANTY
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what
it does.>
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY
"AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
DEU
TSCH
Copyright © <year> <name of author>
ESPA
ÑOL
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
ITALI
ANO
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
NOR
SK
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NEDER
LANDS
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General
Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston,
MA 02110-1301 USA
POR
TUGUÊS
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and
paper mail.
中文
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer)
or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the
library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne,
Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
한국어
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
SVEN
SKA
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
That's all there is to it!
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software
that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by
РУСС
КИЙ
SUO
MI
About the OpenSSL Toolkit
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
Copyright© 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
POL
SKI
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
License
Agreement
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]) All rights reserved.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
ViewSonic
278
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Support
For technical support or product service, see the table below or contact your reseller.
Note : You will need the product serial number.
T = Telephone
F = FAX
Country/Region
Website
Email
AUS= 1800 880 818
NZ= 0800 008 822
Australia/New Zealand
www.viewsonic.com.au
T (Toll-Free)= 1-866-463-4775
T (Toll)= 1-424-233-2533
F= 1-909-468-3757
Canada
www.viewsonic.com
Europe
Hong Kong
India
www.viewsoniceurope.com
www.hk.viewsonic.com
www.in.viewsonic.com
www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/support/call-desk/
T= 852 3102 2900
T= 1800 11 9999
www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/
support/call-desk/
Ireland (Eire)
www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/
www.kr.viewsonic.com
www.viewsonic.com/la/
www.viewsonic.com/la/
www.viewsonic.com/la/
www.viewsonic.com/la/
Korea
T= 080 333 2131
T= 0800-4441185
T= 1230-020-7975
T= 01800-9-157235
T= 001-8882328722
Latin America
(Argentina)
Latin America (Chile)
Latin America
(Columbia)
Latin America (Mexico)
Renta y Datos, 29 SUR 721, COL. LA PAZ, 72160 PUEBLA, PUE. Tel: 01.222.891.55.77 CON 10 LINEAS
Electroser, Av Reforma No. 403Gx39 y 41, 97000 Mérida, Yucatán. Tel: 01.999.925.19.16
Other places please refer to http://www.viewsonic.com/la/soporte/index.htm#Mexico
Latin America (Peru)
Macau
www.viewsonic.com/la/
www.hk.viewsonic.com
ap.viewsonic.com/me/
T= 0800-54565
T= 853 2870 0303
Contact your reseller
Middle East
T= 1-800-688-6688 (English)
T= 1-866-379-1304 (Spanish)
F= 1-909-468-3757
Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands
www.viewsonic.com
Singapore/Malaysia/Thailand
South Africa
www.ap.viewsonic.com
ap.viewsonic.com/za/
T= 65 6461 6044
Contact your reseller
www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/
support/call-desk/
United Kingdom
www.viewsoniceurope.com/uk/
T (Toll-Free)= 1-800-688-6688
T (Toll)= 1-424-233-2530
F= 1-909-468-3757
United States
www.viewsonic.com
ViewSonic
279
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty
®
VIEWSONIC PROJECTOR
What the warranty covers:
ViewSonic warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship, under normal
use, during the warranty period. If a product proves to be defective in material or workmanship during
the warranty period, ViewSonic will, at its sole option, repair or replace the product with a like product.
Replacement product or parts may include remanufactured or refurbished parts or components.
Limited Three (3) year General Warranty
Subject to the more limited one (1) year warranty set out below, North and South America: Three (3)
years warranty for all parts excluding the lamp, three (3) years for labor, and one (1) year for the original
lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase; Europe except Poland: Three (3) years warranty for
all parts excluding the lamp, three (3) years for labor, and ninety (90) days for the original lamp from the
date of the first consumer purchase; Poland: Two (2) years warranty for all parts excluding the lamp,
two (2) years for labor, and ninety (90) days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer
purchase.
Limited One (1) year Heavy Usage Warranty:
Under heavy usage settings, where a projector’s use includes more than fourteen (14) hours average
daily usage, North and South America: One (1) year warranty for all parts excluding the lamp, one (1)
year for labor, and ninety (90) days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase;
Europe: One (1) year warranty for all parts excluding the lamp, one (1) year for labor, and ninety (90)
days for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer purchase.
Other regions or countries: Please check with your local dealer or local ViewSonic office for the
warranty information.
Lamp warranty subject to terms and conditions, verification and approval. Applies to manufacturer’s
installed lamp only. All accessory lamps purchased separately are warranted for 90 days.
Who the warranty protects:
This warranty is valid only for the first consumer purchaser.
What the warranty does not cover:
1. Any product on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed.
2. Damage, deterioration, failure, or malfunction resulting from:
a. Accident, abuse, misuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning, or other acts of nature, improper
maintenance, unauthorized product modification, or failure to follow instructions supplied
with the product.
b. Operation outside of product specifications.
c. Operation of the product for other than the normal intended use or not under normal
conditions.
d. Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by ViewSonic.
e. Any damage of the product due to shipment.
f. Removal or installation of the product.
g. Causes external to the product, such as electric power fluctuations or failure.
h. Use of supplies or parts not meeting ViewSonic’s specifications.
i. Normal wear and tear.
j. Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect.
3. Removal, installation, and set-up service charges.
ViewSonic
280
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to get service:
1. For information about receiving service under warranty, contact ViewSonic Customer Support
(please refer to “Customer Support” page). You will need to provide your product’s serial number.
2. To obtain warranted service, you will be required to provide (a) the original dated sales slip, (b) your name,
(c) your address, (d) a description of the problem, and (e) the serial number of the product.
3. Take or ship the product freight prepaid in the original container to an authorized ViewSonic
service center or ViewSonic.
4. For additional information or the name of the nearest ViewSonic service center, contact ViewSonic.
Limitation of implied warranties:
There are no warranties, express or implied, which extend beyond the description contained herein
including the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Exclusion of damages:
ViewSonic’s liability is limited to the cost of repair or replacement of the product. ViewSonic shall not
be liable for:
1. Damage to other property caused by any defects in the product, damages based upon
inconvenience, loss of use of the product, loss of time, loss of profits, loss of business opportunity,
loss of goodwill, interference with business relationships, or other commercial loss, even if advised
of the possibility of such damages.
2. Any other damages, whether incidental, consequential or otherwise.
3. Any claim against the customer by any other party.
Effect of state law:
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state
to state. Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties and/or do not allow the exclusion
of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
Sales outside the U.S.A. and Canada:
For warranty information and service on ViewSonic products sold outside of the U.S.A. and Canada,
contact ViewSonic or your local ViewSonic dealer.
The warranty period for this product in mainland China (Hong Kong, Macao and Taiwan Excluded) is
subject to the terms and conditions of the Maintenance Guarantee Card.
For users in Europe and Russia, full details of warranty provided can be found in www.
viewsoniceurope.com under Support/Warranty Information.
4.3: Projector Warranty
PRJ_LW01 Rev. 1h 06-25-07
ViewSonic
281
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mexico Limited Warranty
®
VIEWSONIC PROJECTOR
What the warranty covers:
ViewSonic warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship, under normal use, during the
warranty period. If a product proves to be defective in material or workmanship during the warranty period, ViewSonic
will, at its sole option, repair or replace the product with a like product. Replacement product or parts may include
remanufactured or refurbished parts or components & accessories.
How long the warranty is effective:
3 years for all parts excluding the lamp, 3 years for labor, 1 year for the original lamp from the date of the first consumer
purchase.
Lamp warranty subject to terms and conditions, verification and approval. Applies to manufacturer’s installed lamp only.
All accessory lamps purchased separately are warranted for 90 days.
Who the warranty protects:
This warranty is valid only for the first consumer purchaser.
What the warranty does not cover:
1. Any product on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed.
2. Damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from:
a. Accident, misuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning, or other acts of nature, unauthorized product modification,
unauthorized attempted repair, or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product.
b. Any damage of the product due to shipment.
c. Causes external to the product, such as electrical power fluctuations or failure.
d. Use of supplies or parts not meeting ViewSonic’s specifications.
e. Normal wear and tear.
f. Any other cause which does not relate to a product defect.
3. Any product exhibiting a condition commonly known as “image burn-in” which results when a static image is
displayed on the product for an extended period of time.
4. Removal, installation, insurance, and set-up service charges.
How to get service:
For information about receiving service under warranty, contact ViewSonic Customer Support (Please refer to the
attached Customer Support page). You will need to provide your product’s serial number, so please record the
product information in the space provided below on your purchase for your future use. Please retain your receipt of
proof of purchase to support your warranty claim.
For Your Records
Product Name: ________________________ Model Number: __________________________
Document Number: ____________________ Serial Number: ___________________________
Purchase Date: ________________________Extended Warranty Purchase? _______________(Y/N)
If so, what date does warranty expire? _________
1. To obtain warranty service, you will be required to provide (a) the original dated sales slip, (b) your name, (c)
your address, (d) a description of the problem, and (e) the serial number of the product.
2. Take or ship the product in the original container packaging to an authorized ViewSonic service center.
3. Round trip transportation costs for in-warranty products will be paid by ViewSonic.
Limitation of implied warranties:
There are no warranties, express or implied, which extend beyond the description contained herein including the
implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Exclusion of damages:
ViewSonic’s liability is limited to the cost of repair or replacement of the product. ViewSonic shall not be liable for:
1. Damage to other property caused by any defects in the product, damages based upon inconvenience, loss of
use of the product, loss of time, loss of profits, loss of business opportunity, loss of goodwill, interference with
business relationships, or other commercial loss, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
2. Any other damages, whether incidental, consequential or otherwise.
3. Any claim against the customer by any other party.
4. Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by ViewSonic.
ViewSonic
282
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contact Information for Sales & Authorized Service (Centro Autorizado de Servicio) within Mexico:
Name, address, of manufacturer and importers:
México, Av. de la Palma #8 Piso 2 Despacho 203, Corporativo Interpalmas,
Col. San Fernando Huixquilucan, Estado de México
Tel: (55) 3605-1099 http://www.viewsonic.com/la/soporte/index.htm
NÚMERO GRATIS DE ASISTENCIA TÉCNICA PARA TODO MÉXICO: 001.866.823.2004
Hermosillo:
Villahermosa:
Distribuciones y Servicios Computacionales SA de CV.
Calle Juarez 284 local 2
Col. Bugambilias C.P: 83140
Tel: 01-66-22-14-9005
E-Mail: [email protected]
Puebla, Pue. (Matriz):
Compumantenimietnos Garantizados, S.A. de C.V.
AV. GREGORIO MENDEZ #1504
COL, FLORIDA C.P. 86040
Tel: 01 (993) 3 52 00 47 / 3522074 / 3 52 20 09
E-Mail: [email protected]
Veracruz, Ver.:
RENTA Y DATOS, S.A. DE C.V. Domicilio:
29 SUR 721 COL. LA PAZ
72160 PUEBLA, PUE.
CONEXION Y DESARROLLO, S.A DE C.V. Av. Americas # 419
ENTRE PINZÓN Y ALVARADO
Fracc. Reforma C.P. 91919
Tel: 01(52).222.891.55.77 CON 10 LINEAS
E-Mail: [email protected]
Chihuahua
Tel: 01-22-91-00-31-67
E-Mail: [email protected]
Cuernavaca
Soluciones Globales en Computación
C. Magisterio # 3321 Col. Magisterial
Chihuahua, Chih.
Tel: 4136954
E-Mail: [email protected]
Distrito Federal:
Compusupport de Cuernavaca SA de CV
Francisco Leyva # 178 Col. Miguel Hidalgo
C.P. 62040, Cuernavaca Morelos
Tel: 01 777 3180579 / 01 777 3124014
E-Mail: [email protected]
Guadalajara, Jal.:
QPLUS, S.A. de C.V.
SERVICRECE, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Coyoacán 931
Av. Niños Héroes # 2281
Col. Del Valle 03100, México, D.F.
Tel: 01(52)55-50-00-27-35
E-Mail : [email protected]
Col. Arcos Sur, Sector Juárez
44170, Guadalajara, Jalisco
Tel: 01(52)33-36-15-15-43
E-Mail: [email protected]
Monterrey:
Guerrero Acapulco
GS Computación (Grupo Sesicomp)
Progreso #6-A, Colo Centro
39300 Acapulco, Guerrero
Tel: 744-48-32627
Global Product Services
Mar Caribe # 1987, Esquina con Golfo Pérsico
Fracc. Bernardo Reyes, CP 64280
Monterrey N.L. México
Tel: 8129-5103
E-Mail: [email protected]
Oaxaca, Oax.:
MERIDA:
ELECTROSER
CENTRO DE DISTRIBUCION Y
SERVICIO, S.A. de C.V.
Murguía # 708 P.A., Col. Centro, 68000, Oaxaca
Tel: 01(52)95-15-15-22-22
Av Reforma No. 403Gx39 y 41
Mérida, Yucatán, México CP97000
Tel: (52) 999-925-1916
E-Mail: [email protected]
Fax: 01(52)95-15-13-67-00
E-Mail. [email protected]
FOR USA SUPPORT:
Tijuana:
STD
ViewSonic Corporation
Av Ferrocarril Sonora #3780 L-C
Col 20 de Noviembre
Tijuana, Mexico
381 Brea Canyon Road, Walnut, CA. 91789 USA
Tel: 800-688-6688 (English); 866-323-8056 (Spanish);
Fax: 1-800-685-7276
E-Mail: http://www.viewsonic.com
4.3: ViewSonic Mexico Limited Warranty
PRJ_LW03 Rev. 1A 06-25-07
ViewSonic
283
Pro9500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|